ITie  Joi 


O 


lt 


/?s  Jr    '         ^ 

'tfSMA^  X^^<^^^^$C 

/  -    #• 


The  Journey  of  the  Soul 

and  the 
Ethereal  World 


E.  RUDER  DROLLINGER 


Copyright, 

h 

Occult  <Pul>.  Co. 
All  rights  reserved 

#00 


THIS    BOOK 

Is  most  gratefully  dedicated  to  my  Beloved 
Teacher,  Dr.  Sharp,  from  the  Seventh  Zone — with 
sincerest  appreciation  to  each  and  all  of  my  Invis- 
ible Helpers  who  assisted  in  this  marvelous  Revel- 
ation for  the  Uplift  of  Humanity — 

and  herewith  I 

express  my  sincerest  thanks  for  the  privilege  of 
these  many  wonderful  journeys  to  the  World  of 
Soul  and  for  the  Unselfish  Loving  Service  ren- 
dered in  so  many  unspeakable  ways. 

Sincerely, 

E.  Ruder  Drollinger 


CONTENTS 

Notice —  Journeys  to  the  Ethereal  World  by 
the  Author  and  Various  Experiences 
while  There. 

Preface. — 

Chapter  1 — Introduction — The  Ethereal  Zones — 
Where  They  Are — Their  Distances 
from  the  Earth. 

Chapter  2.— First  Inhabited  Zone— The  Shadow 
Zone — The  Dwellers — Their  Condi- 
tion and  the  Cause. 

Chapter  3. — Second  Zone — The  Domestic  Belt  in 
in  the  Ethereal  World — Its  Dwellers 
— Their  Condition — and  the  Cause. 

Chapter  4.— Third  Zone— The  Manufacturing  Belt 
— The  First  Spiritual  Atmosphere — 
The  Beginning  of  our  Journey  of 
Spiritual  Progression. 

Chapter  5. — Fourth  Zone — The  Musical  Belt  in 
the  Ethereal  World— the  Dwellers 
and  its  Conditions. 

Chapter  6.— The  Fifth  Zone— The  First  Heaven- 
ly Zone  in  the  Ethereal  World— The 
Great  Scholarly  Belt. 

Chapter  7. — Conclusion. 


NOTICE. 

This  Marvelous  Revelation  has  not  been  gath- 
ered from  any  source  on  this  earth  realm.  This 
knowledge  and  wisdom  has  been  handed  down  to 
me  from  a  Divine  Source  embracing  the  actual 
experiences  of  my  life  since  a  child  of  twelve. 
The  Divine  Intelligences  who  have  imparted  this 
knowledge  and  wisdom  to  me  are  now  dwellers  of 
the  Seventh  Heavenly  Zone  and  the  Celestial 
Divine  Kingdoms,  and  from  one  of  the  Masters 
who  is  serving  in  the  capacity  as  a  guardian  angel. 
A  guardian  angel  is  one  who  has  overcome  worlds. 
Every  soul,  no  matter  in  what  scale  of  life  he  may 
be,  is  accompanied  through  this  expression  of  life 
and  through  the  Ethereal  World  by  a  guardian 
angel.  This  divine  being  never  makes  himself 
known  until  YOU  are  ready  for  his  wisdom  or  on 
some  special  occasion  when  we  are  in  desperate 
need  or  distress  and  cry  out  for  guidance  and  help. 
It  is  this  Divine  Being  whose  presence  you  will 
feel  or  whose  voice  you  will  hear.  I  know  many 


who  have  had  these  experiences.  There  are  those 
on  the  earth  realm  to-day  who  are  so  caloused — 
so  dense  or  materially  minded  that  they  could  not 
perceive  these  facts — and  there  are  thousands  who 
have  had  sufficient  revelations  to  realize  that  they 
are  never  alone  and  that  some  unknown  divine 
force  is  ever  guiding  or  leading  the  way  when  we 
lift  our  minds  above  the  material  vibrations  and 
desire  divine  guidance.  No  one  can  read  these 
pages  and  not  feel  and  realize  the  great  purpose 
of  this  life — and  that  activity  is  a  natural  law 
displayed  throughout  the  universe.  If  we  fail  to 
see  the  purpose  of  this  expression  of  life,  we  must 
fulfill  the  requirements  in  the  lower  zones  of  che 
ethereal  world. 

Fifteen  years  ago  this  book  was  written  for 
publication — but  felt  the  world  was  not  ready  for 
its  contents.  Realizing  its  contents  made  too 
large  a  book  for  convenience,  I  decided  to  separate 
it  into  three  or  four  volumes.  This  issue  consti- 
tutes the  first  volume — or  one-half  of  our  journey 
through  the  Ethereal  Zones  in  which  we  must 
function.  Volume  two  will  reveal  the  higher 
zones  and  their  condition.  Volume  three  the  laws 
of  progression.  Volume  four  the  secret  of  healing. 

To  leave  the  physical  body  and  journey  out  into 
space  is  a  natural  event.  Every  individual  while 
asleep  leaves  his  phsyical  body.  You,  the  Ego 
or  spirit,  during  sleep  or  rest  of  the  physical  body 
are  attracted  out  into  vibrations  of  your  own  cre- 
ation and  you  wander  to  these  conditions  and 


places.  Many  times  the  experiences  which  you 
encounter  at  that  time  are  so  strongly  impressed 
upon  your  consciousness  that  when  you  return  to 
your  physical  body  to  again  arouse  it  into  activity, 
it  is  clearly  revealed  to  your  mind  and  impressed 
upon  your  brain  and  you  say:  "I  was  dreaming." 

The  majority  of  individuals  do  not  journey  far 
away  from  their  physical  body — because  they  are 
so  intensely  interested  in  material  things  and 
material  conditions — in  their  immediate  relatives 
and  friends  or  business  and  social  associates — or 
in  their  environments  of  the  home  and  their  busi- 
ness that  they  are  attracted  to  these  vibrations 
which  enmeshes  the  soul  and  prevents  it  from 
traveling  out  any  great  distance.  Many  have 
never  traveled  out  beyond  the  earth's  atmosphere. 
All  could  travel  out  into  spheres  beyond  this 
earth  realm  if  their  thoughts  and  vibrations  ex- 
tended out  to  those  realms,  and  if  they  were  suffi- 
ciently unfolded  to  understand  the  law.  Many 
individuals  never  think  of  anything  beyond  the 
common  every-day  events.  Then  how  could  they 
travel  out  beyond  such  vibrations? 

Many  times  before  starting  out  on  these  soul 
journeys  I  would  stand  before  my  bed  looking 
down  upon  my  physical  body  lying  on  the  bed, 
realizing  that  the  physical  body  is  only  a  counter- 
part of  the  soul  body.  Touching  the  soul  body 
with  my  hands  it  felt  as  natural  and  tangible  to 
my  soul  senses  as  does  the  physical  body  to  my 
physical  senses.  Testing  my  memory  and  con- 


sciousness,  I  realized  that  the  past,  present  and 
the  future  plans  were  just  as  real  in  my  soul  body 
— in  fact  my  perceptions  were  keener.  Many 
times  while  I  was  looking  upon  my  physical  body, 
I  could  hear  the  city  clock  strike  the  hour  and  I 
could  hear  the  conversation  of  those  passing  by 
on  the  street  below — in  fact  my  environments  and 
all  conditions  were  just  as  natural  and  just  as 
tangible  while  functioning  in  the  soul  body.  In 
going  out  into  other  realms  I  was  cognizant  of 
floating  through  the  atmosphere  and  conscious 
of  the  scenery  and  conditions  as  I  encountered 
them;  I  could  hear  the  howling  wind  and  could 
see  the  downpour  of  rain,  see  the  clouds  below  me, 
but  somehow  always  passed  through  the  lower 
Stratas  unconsciously  and  arriving  in  some  one 
of  the  zones  consciously. 

Consciousness  and  memory  do  not  belong  to  the 
physical  body,  but  are  of  the  soul.  Consciousness 
is  the  light  of  the  spirit  and  memory  is  the  regis- 
ter of  events  in  the  soul.  We  function  through 
the  soul  body  with  much  greater  ease — with  less 
effort  than  we  do  in  the  physical  body.  We  take 
with  us  all  our  likes  and  dislikes — all  our  affections 
and  fears.  In  traveling  out  from  the  physical 
body  we  must  come  into  a  conscious  realization 
that  we  have  nothing  to  fear.  I  passed  into  the 
first  zone  and  took  cognizance  of  its  conditions' 
and  dwellers — I  have  passed  through  every  zone 
of  our  planet  as  well  as  through  the  intervening 
spaces,  have  partaken  of  their  social  affairs,  have 


been  the  guest  of  friends  partaking  of  their 
repast  on  their  beautiful  lawn,  have  enjoyed  the 
magnificent  scenery,  the  beautiful  flowers,  moun- 
tains, rivers,  lakes,  forests  and  waterfalls;  have 
been  in  their  libraries  and  temples  of  worship  and 
temples  of  learning  and  also  in  their  healing  tem- 
ples and  homes  of  rest,  have  seen  the  masters, 
adepts,  artists,  angels,  our  Christ  and  His  apos- 
tles ;  but  when  I  saw  Christ  and  His  apostles  seat- 
ed around  Him,  a  screen  that  looks  like  a  plain 
thin  net  was  placed  between  us,  and  when  I  ques- 
tioned why  this  was  done,  the  reply  was — It  was 
placed  there  to  protect  you  from  the  intense  illu- 
mination and  His  intense  power.  They  were  just 
as  visible  in  back  of  this  veil  and  just  as  clear  to 
me — this  divine,  wonderful  power  penetrated 
every  atom  of  my  being — it  was  like  the  currents 
of  an  electric  battery  flowing  through  my 
soul.  I  will  relate  a  few  of  the  many 
journeys  through  the  world  of  soul  that  you  may 
have  some  idea  of  the  nature  of  these  experiences. 
After  viewing  my  physical  body  lying  on  the  bed, 
I  floated  out  into  the  atmosphere,  over  trees, 
clouds  and  all  conditions  and  landed  in  the  third 
zone;  sat  on  a  very  large  rock  that  stood  about 
four  feet  from  the  ground  contentedly  taking 
cognizance  of  my  environments.  On  one  side  of 
me  was  a  beautiful  field  of  flowers  and  the  mag- 
nificent view  of  lovely  scenery.  Sensing  the  invig- 
orating refreshing  atmosphere  and  thinking  I  was 
alone,  I  said  to  myself:  This  just  suits  me.  I 


shall  remain  right  here  and  not  return  to  my 
physical  body.  Immediately  I  heard  a  voice  say- 
ing: Let  us  continue  our  journey  and  go  up 
higher.  This  surprised  me,  but  I  was  perfectly 
willing  to  go  further,  so  we  started.  I  felt  his 
force  in  back  of  me  as  we  floated  along.  Finally 
we  were  out  in  space,  surrounded  by  many  lumi- 
nous bodies  hanging  in  space — (nearly  every  one 
has  looked  through  some  telescope  at  the  different 
planets  hanging  in  space).  As  I  was  gazing 
at  this  wonderful  sight,  wondering  which  was  our 
planet,  the  earth,  the  voice  said:  Which  is  the 
earth?  I  looked  at  one  and  then  another  and  then 
replied :  I  hardly  know  except  I  feel  so  attracted 
to  this  one  over  here  at  my  left.  He  said:  We 
will  draw  nearer  and  see.  As  we  floated 
near,  watching  the  planets  revolve  on  their  axes* 
and  in  their  given  path,  I  was  so  delighted  with 
this  wonderful  opportunity  which  words  are  inad- 
equate to  express.  Finally  we  were  close  to  this 
planet  which  I  presumed  was  our  earth.  Again  I 
heard  the  voice  say:  Are  you  sure  this  is  the 
earth?  I  replied:  No,  I'm  not  certain,  and  yet 
I  feel  this  is  it.  I  can't  tell,  because  I  can't  see 
the  people  plain  enough  to  distinguish  any  of 
them.  (The  sight  was  like  that  which  you  wit- 
ness when  looking  down  upon  pedestrians  from  a 
fifteen  story  building.)  He  said:  We  will  draw 
nearer.  And,  as  we  did  so,  I  replied:  Now  I 
can  see  many  familiar  faces.  But,  oh,  I  sense 
their  terrible  heart-aches.  In  watching  them,  I 


6 


could  see  the  path  that  was  intended  for  them, 
and  see  the  path  into  which  they  were  drifting. 
I  saw  the  conditions  and  obstacles  they  would  en- 
counter and  knew  the  suffering  it  would  create, 
and  all  this  so  overwhelmed  me  that  I  turned  to 
the  one  at  my  side — the  voice  that  had  been 
directing  me — and  said  to  him:  It  seems  as  if 
these  people  ought  to  be  directed  into  the  right 
path  and  as  You  see  the  conditions  and  know  so 
well,  why  don't  you  tell  them  what  to  do  and 
which  way  to  turn?  His  answer  was:  Did  you 
ever  try  to  tell  any  one  what  to  do  and  what  not  to 
do  or  direct  their  affairs  ?  Have  you  not  observed 
that  they  immediately  resent  it  and  immediately 
let  you  know  that  it  is  their  privilege  and  their 
affair  to  do  just  as  they  please?  Can  you  not  see 
that  these  individuals  need  just  the  lessons  that 
they  will  get  through  these  bitter  experiences  con- 
fronting them  ?  Can  you  not  see  that  it  is  through 
trials  and  sorrows  that  the  soul  wakes  up  and 
turns  its  face  towards  higher  ideals?  We  do  not 
come  to  live  your  life  or  to  dictate  to  you,  but  we 
come  to  assist  all  who  desire  us  and  are  ready  for 
our  help. 

When  you  send  out  your  prayers  to  God  for 
guidance  and  for  help,  we  come  as  his  messengers 
to  answer  your  prayers — to  uplift  you  and  guide 
you  and  assist  you.  We  are  the  messengers  from 
God  and  understand  His  law.  When  you  need  me 
call  for  me — we  are  at  your  service.  Again  we 
floated  on  and  I  found  myself  back  on  the  same 


rock.  Thinking  again  I  was  alone  and  meditating 
over  the  sights  I  had  witnessed,  especially  the 
aching  hearts  which  I  sensed — Again  I  determined 
I  would  not  return  to  my  physical  body. 

Again  the  same  voice  replied  to  my  thoughts — 
calmly,  slowly  and  in  a  most  emphatic  manner — 
Come ;  it  is  time  we  return.  I  said :  Oh,  Fm  not 
going  back — you  may  go  if  you  like,  but  I  shall 
remain  here.  Again  he  said:  Yes,  you  must 
return. 

Immediately  I  lost  consciousness  and  did  not 
awaken  until  I  took  possession  of  my  physical 
body.  Then  I  realized  that  if  I  desired  to  partici- 
pate in  these  beautiful  beneficial  journeys,  I  must 
be  willing  to  return  to  my  physical  body  in  due 
time.  After  this  experience,  I  was  always  ready 
and  anxious  to  go  and  willing  to  return.  This  was 
a  most  wonderful  lesson  and  all  who  read  these 
pages  will  grasp  the  lesson  in  the  degree  of  their 
unfoldment. 

In  the  second  zone,  I  had  the  privilege  of  trav- 
eling through  space  in  one  of  their  aeroplanes, 
which  was  constructed  differently  from  any  that 
I  have  seen  on  this  earth  realm.  Its  top  resembled 
our  canvas — open  on  the  sides.  While  sitting 
there  contentedly  enjoying  the  ride,  we  came  in 
contact  with  sheets  of  rain  pouring  into  the  side 
of  the  machine.  I  heard  the  howling  wind  and 
watched  the  storm;  all  of  which  I  thoroughly 
enjoyed. 

A  few  years  ago,  while  suffering  from  extreme 

8 


exhaustion  after  preparing  breakfast  and  all  the 
household  had  departed  for  business,  I  tried  to 
dress  to  go  downtown,  but  found  it  was  utterly 
impossible.  I  laid  down  on  the  bed  to  rest,  but  it 
seemed  as  though  I  could  not  exist.  I  sent  out  a 
prayer  for  help  and  as  I  was  doing  this,  I  saw  a 
woman  many  miles  away  suspended  in  the  atmos- 
phere, holding  out  both  hands,  beckoning  me  to 
come  on.  I  told  her  I  was  too  weak  to  come.  I 
watched  her  descend,  holding  out  her  hands  all 
the  way  as  she  floated  down  towards  me.  Soon  I 
found  myself  going  and  landed  in  the  beautiful 
"Temple  of  Hope,"  from  which  I  saw  her  come 
forth.  It  is  on  top  of  a  high  elevation  or  moun- 
tain with  its  beautiful  surroundings.  I  was  im- 
mediately placed  in  a  Rose  Room  where  the  walls, 
the  floor,  the  couch,  every  particle  was  covered 
with  pink  roses;  and  as  I  lay  down  on  the  couch 
of  roses,  I  said,  Oh,  how  kind!  What  a  relief!  I 
just  want  to  stay  here  forever  and  ever;  and  then 
I  sank  into  a  state  where  I  had  no  thought,  I  had 
no  desire,  I  only  realized  that  I  was  peaceful  and 
happy.  The  aroma  of  the  roses  was  such  a  sooth- 
ing balm  to  my  weakened  condition.  By  and  by, 
I  felt  myself  being  quickened  into  a  different  state 
of  Consciousness  and  immediately  returned  to  my 
bed.  After  taking  possession  of  my  body,  I  found 
I  was  gone  several  hours,  but  was  fully  recuper- 
ated and  ready  to  assume  my  duties.  This  "Tem- 
ple of  Hope"  is  in  the  Third  zone. 
The  flowers  in  that  room  are  vibrant  with  life; 


they  never  wilt — they  never  decay — they  are 
always  fresh — perfect ;  in  fact  are  life — life — life. 

In  the  soul  world  beneficient  angels  gather  to- 
gether by  the  thousands.  They  decide  what  kind 
of  a  structure  they  desire  to  erect — its  purpose 
and  arrangements  and  surroundings.  They  take 
into  consiedration  the  minutest  details  and  when 
all  is  planned  satisfactorily  in  their  consciousness 
— then  in  unison  they  concentrate  their  thoughts 
and  the  building  is  erected  and  perfect.  This  is 
thought  made  manifest  or  objectified,  and  this  is 
the  way  the  beautiful  structures  throughout  the 
world  of  soul  have  been  erected  and  thus  the  mag- 
nificent Temples  are  constructed.  Not  with  hands, 
but  with  spiritual  substance  through  the  power  of 
thought.  Man  does  not  create  nature  in  the  world 
of  the  soul.  The  mountains,  the  flowers,  the  ani- 
mals, birds,  the  oceans,  lakes  and  rivers  are  God's 
creation.  Always  remember  that  such  angels  are 
Divine  Beings  of  Wisdom. 

In  the  Fourth  Zone  are  many  beautiful  water- 
falls streaming  down  some  mountain — many  cata- 
racts, streams,  lakes,  and  oceans.  Here  I  have  on 
various  occasions  found  an  oarsman  with  a  boat 
awaiting  my  coming — gently  assist  me  in  the  boat 
and  row  through  some  beautiful  stream  with  its 
mountains,  trees,  ferns  and  wild  flowers  along  the 
shore  where  the  echo  of  the  murmuring  water  re- 
verberates through  the  mountains  while  the 
squirrels  and  other  animals  are  playing  "hide 
and  seek." 


10 


Knowing  of  the  many  libraries  in  the  Fifth 
Zone,  it  created  within  me  an  intense  desire  to 
get  hold  of  some  of  these  books  and  open  their 
pages,  so  on  various  occasions  when  I  entered  the 
different  libraries,  I  noticed  and  felt  that  I  was 
carefully  being  watched,  as  no  mortal  would  be 
permitted  to  touch  these  books.  On  one  occasion, 
I  entered  the  library  that  contained  the  history  of 
our  lives,  and  as  I  entered,  I  saw  a  young  man 
behind  the  table  reaching  for  a  volume  on  the 
lower  shelf.  I  was  rather  startled  to  see  him  as 
I  thought  now  was  my  opportunity  to  look  at  the 
title  of  these  books.  I  immediately  was  repelled. 
I  felt  the  power  prohibiting  me  from  going  any 
farther,  so  I  looked  at  the  many  volumes  from  a 
distance.  Presently,  he  went  to  the  entrance  of 
the  opposite  opening  (there  were  two  large  rooms 
connected  through  a  large  archway)  and  said: 
You  may  come  near  and  look  at  the  many  volumes 
in  this  room.  I  did  so,  thanking  him  and  apolo- 
gizing for  trying  to  overstep  my  privileges,  say- 
ing :  I  did  not  realize  that  it  was  not  permissible. 

In  this  same  zone  is  that  ..wonderful,  beautiful 
"Temple  of  Love,"  as  I  went  up  the  winding  road 
that  leads  to  this  Temple,  I  noticed  the  door  being 
closed  and  I  felt  disappointed  as  I  wanted  to  look 
in.  But  as  I  drew  nearer  I  saw  the  doors  open  and 
a  Master,  in  his  beautiful  white  robe,  stood  in  the 
doorway  and  bid  me  come  and  look.  The  Divine 
Holiness  of  such  an  atmosphere  could  never  be 
forgotten  by  one  who  experienced  its  power. 

11 


In  the  space  between  the  Fifth  and  Sixth  zones 
is  called  a  sphere  of  lakes.  Here  are  so  many 
kinds  of  bodies  of  water — some  have  wonderful 
medicinal  properties.  In  strolling  through  this 
sphere  in  company  with  one  of  my  Teachers,  I 
noticed  one  lake  was  particularly  clear — so  much 
so  that  you  could  see  the  pebbles,  the  sand  at  the 
bottom.  At  first  glance  you  would  assume  that  it 
is  very  shallow,  but  after  viewing  this  wonderful 
body  of  water  you  felt  its  depth  is  enormous  and 
that  it  is  its  peculiar  properties  that  makes  it  so 
transparent.  Other  bodies  of  water  were  of  dif- 
ferent colors  and  of  various  sizes — some  had  at 
one  time  embraced  much  larger  space,  but  were 
changing  and  some  were  almost  dried  up,  leaving 
only  traces  where  once  was  a  lake.  As  I  remarked 
about  this  one  being  almost  closed,  my  Teacher 
replied:  Yes,  this  is  the  lake  in  which  Jesus  of 
Nazareth  bathed  when  he  was  dwelling  on  earth 
in  a  physical  body.  He  would  often  ascend  to  this 
sphere  and  bathe  in  its  water,  which  at  that  time 
formed  a  lake.  But  on  account  of  the  many  con- 
vulsions of  this  planet,  this  body  which  was  once 
a  lake  has  almost  entirely  closed  up.  Then  we 
strolled  on,  viewing  the  mountains — I  noticed  the 
sand  and  earth  looked  like  ours  on  this  earth 
realm.  Not  far  distant,  on  the  other  side  of  the 
mountain,  where  the  bare  rock,  with  its  rose- 
colored  hue,  towers  in  a  majestic  attitude  for 
many  feet — at  its  base  is  another  beautiful  lake 
surrounded  by  many  spruce  trees  and  on  its 


12 


banks  sat  many  individuals  in  their  bathing  cos- 
tumes, awaiting  my  coming,  and  as  I  joined  them, 
they  ducked  into  the  water  above  their  knees  and 
out  again,  saying:  Come,  you  do  the  same.  I 
hesitated,  assuring  them  I  would  rather  enjoy 
watching  them  as  I  was  sure  I  could  not  do  it. 
Come  right  on,  you  can  do  it,  they  said  in  unison, 
and  then  I  felt  their  power  over  me,  which  made 
me  feel  I  could,  and  so  I  ventured  and  did  duck  in 
and  out,  never  going  in  any  further  than  over  my 
knees — all  of  which  was  great  fun. 

In  the  Sixth  Zone  I  was  shown  the  views  of  the 
first  and  second  Celestial  Kingdoms  by  a  process 
similar  to  our  moving  picture  apparatus  except  it 
is  a  more  improved  process.  The  scenery  shifts 
so  gradual  and  evenly  and  continuously  that  it  is 
as  though  you  were  right  on  the  ground  approach- 
ing the  various  objects  or  buildings,  passing  from 
view  just  as  they  would  if  you  were  walking  by. 

In  the  Seventh  I  have  come  face  to  face  with 
our  beloved  Master,  Jesus  of  Nazareth — "Our 
Christ."  The  radiation  around  his  head  extends 
out  a  great  distance  and  is  more  brilliant  and  looks 
much  larger  than  our  sun.  He  does  not  come  to 
this  earth  realm.  He  never  descends  below  the 
Fourth  zone  and  goes  to  the  Fourth  zone  only  on 
special  occasions.  His  power  can  be  felt  from 
there  very  perceptibly  and  we  can  be  lifted  to 
behold  Him  at  this  distance  if  we  are  fitted  and 
eligible  to  ascend.  These  are  only  a  few  of  the 
many  experiences  that  I  have  had,  which  I  have 

13 


related,  that  you  may  realize  that  the  soul  can  and 
does  gravitate  to  Unseen  realms  and  gather 
knowledge  not  dreamed  of  by  the  finite  mind. 

For  many  years  I  have  realized  that  these  won- 
derful privileges  and  experiences  did  not  come 
into  my  life  for  any  personal  or  selfish  gratifica- 
tion— notwithstanding  the  unspeakable  benefits 
and  uplift  and  the  peace  of  mind  derived  from  the 
contact  with  these  Highly  Evolved  and  Illumined 
Intelligences.  I  realized  they  have  a  deeper, 
and  decidedly  universal  significance.  That  all  in- 
dividuals, no  matter  what  their  degree  of  con- 
sciousness in  the  scale  of  life  may  be,  may  realize 
such  a  Divine  Uplift  and  the  Benefits  derived  from 
this  knowldge  of  the  Soul  world  will  manifest  so 
abundantly  while  they  are  still  functioning  in  this 
physical  body  here  on  this  earth  realm — that  it 
will  be  so  apparent  that  none  could  doubt  God's 
ways  of  manifesting  His  Divine  Love  and  Power 
for  the  chilrden  of  earth. 

Sincerely, 
MRS.  EMMA  R.  DROLLINGER. 


14 


PREFACE 

The  message  which  I  bring  to  you  is  not  to 
destroy  that  which  you  already  know,  but  it  is 
to  add  to  your  storehouse  of  knowledge  that  you 
may  broaden  your  views  and  enlarge  your  con- 
sciousness of  that  which  is.  Whether  you  are 
ready  to  believe  the  message  I  bring  you — whether 
you  are  ready  to  digest  its  truth — lies  wholly  with 
you — and  if  in  your  mind  you  see  fit  to  reject  its 
value,  rememebr,  this  truth  remains  a  fact  just 
the  same.  Facts  can  not  be  wiped  out,  for  they 
belong  in  the  realm  of  God's  Kingdom,  and  that 
which  God  has  given  to  the  world  can  never  be 
torn  asunder.  God  carries  out  His  plan  through 
the  scheme  of  Evolution  and  He  sends  His  mes- 
sage through  His  Children.  It  is  because  I  feel 
the  present  pulse  of  the  world  that  I  am  stirred 
into  action.  I  know  the  hungry,  sad  hearts  will 
be  encouraged  and  uplifted  by  this  message  of 
facts  which  so  vitally  concerns  every  human  being, 


15 


and  that  which  I  do  unto  the  least  of  these,  I  do 
unto  God. 

These  facts  have  not  been  given  to  satisfy  my 
eager  cravings  for  truth — but  they  have  a  much 
deeper,  broader  meaning — one  that  is  all  embrac- 
ing— one  that  must  reach  to  the  very  depths  and 
ends  of  this  Globe — that  the  very  least  or  the  very 
lowest  in  the  scale  of  life  may  share  equally  with 
the  highest  in  their  opportunity  of  awakening 
while  he  is  yet  encased  in  this  physical  structure 
that  his  soul  may  be  prepared  to  enter  into  the 
realms  of  Light  instead  of  having  to  pass  through 
the  darkness  and  then  into  the  dawn  and  there 
prepare  for  the  light  of  day  after  he  has  passed 
into  the*  realm  of  Soul. 

Should  you — every  one  of  you,  for  you  are  all 
one  of  this  world — realize  what  it  means  to  uplift 
humanity  while  they  are  functioning  in  this  ex- 
pression of  life — you  would  make  the  effort  to 
carry  this  message  to  the  four  ends  of  this  globe 
and  make  its  appeal  so  loud  that  its  echo  will 
resound  in  every  heart  and  every  home  that  it 
would  be  the  keynote  of  the  day  and  its  rythm  so 
vibrant  with  joy  would  reverberate  in  the  silence 
of  the  night.  When  the  world  will  embrace  these 
facts,  then  you  will  have  justice  and  peace  and 
God's  Kingdom  will  reign  here  on  earth  in  the 
hearts  of  men  as  well  as  in  the  heavenly  spheres 
above  and  sympathy,  through  Divine  Love  will  be 
the  song  of  the  Eternal  Day.  Then  God's  choir 
will  be  in  tune  with  His  orchestra,  the  music  of 

16 


the  Celestial  spheres.  May  you,  who  read  these 
lines,  be  one  of  the  Messengers  of  God  to  spread 
His  Divine  Plan  and  thus  awaken  and  uplift  your 
brother  man. 

In  truth, 

DR.  SHARP. 


17 


INTRODUCTION 

The  Ethereal  World ;  the  World  of  the  Soul ;  the 
abiding  place  of  the  Soul  which  is  so  sacred  unto 
God;  The  Soul  that  Individualized  Conscious 
Intelligent  Eternal  Entity;  The  Crown  and  Sub- 
lime Glory  of  God's  Handiwork. 

The  Ethereal  World;  The  House  with  many 
Mansions  which  God  has  prepared  for  the  Soul 
of  Man ;  the  many  Mansions,  so  Sublime,  so  lofty, 
so  gloriously  beautiful  that  no  Artist  could  do 
justice  to  God's  Work.  No  Mortal  tongue  could 
adequately  describe,  no  finite  Mind  could  perceive. 
Even  those  who  dwell  in  His  Divine  Kingdom 
could  not  find  words  in  our  present  language  that 
would  do  justice  in  describing  this  Sublime  Grand- 
eur of  the  Eternal  City  of  Light  in  which  bask  the 
Souls  who  have  reached  these  heights  through 
Unselfish  Service  and  Divine  Love  for  God's  Chil- 
dren. The  Souls!  The  Souls  of  Men!  How 
Sacred,  How  Sacred. 


18 


So  Sacr  /  unto  God  is  the  Soul  of  Man  that  All 
His  Wisdom,  All  His  Divine  Love  has  been  cen- 
tered in  that  Divine  Center,  the  Soul  of  Man. 
Everywhere  in  the  World  of  Soul  the  dwellers  feel 
the  Divine  Presence  of  God.  In  the  Lower  Zones 
the  inhabitants  do  not  understand  what  this  Tre- 
mendous Power  is  which  they  feel  continually 
hovering  over  them.  God's  Divine  Presence  grad- 
ually reveals  itself  to  all  dwellers  as  they  progress 
in  the  scale  of  Evolution  and  becomes  a  Divine 
Reality  to  All  in  the  Higher  Zones — His  Heavenly 
and  Celestial  Kingdoms. 

In  the  World  of  Soul  Everything  is  so  Holy, 
so  Sacred  to  all  Dwellers  as  they  realize  that  All 
belongs  to  God;  and  here  in  the  World  of  Soul, 
All  is  dedicated  to  the  Holiness  of  the  Lord.  Such 
inscriptions  as  the  following  are  found  on  their 
"Temples  of  Worship,"  "Temples  of  Learning," 
on  their  Houses  of  Congress; — "Justice  to  the 
Lord,"  "Holiness  to  the  Lord,"  "In  Thy  name,  Oh, 
Lord,"  "In  Thee  Lord  we  trust,"  Holy,  Holy,  Holy 
Lord,"  and  many  other  similar  inscriptions. 

All  Poets,  All  Musicians,  All  Masters  through- 
out Eternity  have  sung  praises  to  the  Lord  in  the 
Highest — for  His  glorious  Handiwork.  All  Artists, 
All  Sages,  All  philosophers  have  ever  dedicated 
their  praises  to  the  Lord  for  His  Wisdom,  His 
Power,  His  Divine  Love.  All  Messiahs,  All  Proph- 
ets, All  Wise  Men  throughout  the  ages  have 
heralded  the  glad  tidings  of  God's  Divine  Love  for 
All  humanity  regardless  of  their  position  or  sta- 


19 


tion  in  this  expression  of  life;  regardless  of  their 
mistakes  and  degree  of  consciousness;  and  All 
have  seen  behind  the  external  coat  the  possibili- 
ties of  all  that  is  good  and  all  that  is  Divine  and 
Eternal.  All  have  seen  God  and  His  Handiwork 
in  every  Soul  hidden  in  the  deepest  recesses  of 
His  Being. 

Oh,  praise  the  Lord,  ye  Children  of  Earth. 
Awake!  Arise!  Behold  God  in  every  Soul;  and 
learn  to  realize  that  the  Lowest  as  well  as  the 
Highest  is  Sacred  unto  Him ;  and  that  "Whatever 
ye  do  unto  One  of  these  ye  Shall  do  unto  God." 

Awake!  Arise!  And  Behold  His  Divine  Mes- 
sengers who  herald  the  glad  tidings  of  the  Dawn 
of  a  New  Day.  A  new  Era,  the  Psychic  Age  in 
which  the  Light  of  the  Soul  shall  shine  forth  and 
so  radiate  out  into  the  World  as  a  Power  for  good ; 
a  Power  to  Uplift  Mankind  out  of  the  Fogs  of 
Materiality  into  Spiritual  Light  and  Truth. 

Awake!  Arise?  And  Behold!  It  is  the  Light 
of  the  Soul  that  shall  in  the  coming  age  point  the 
way  for  the  Children  of  Earth;  so  that  all  men 
will  recognize  the  Power  of  God  that  comes 
through  His  Divine  Messengers  of  Light.  So  that 
All  Men  will  look  on  aghast  when  they  behold  the 
Truth;  and  none  will  Dare  to  Overthrow  God's 
Divine  Plan.  All  must  some  time  see  His  Message 
of  Wisdom,  written  in  Symbols;  Letters  and 
Numbers  throughout  the  Universe  Revealing  His 
Law  and  His  Divine  Plan. 


20 


All  must  some  time  journey  above  this  Mate- 
rial plane — 

And  there  come  face  to  face  with  Him  again. 
And  see  in  Letters  of  Gold 
All  praises  dedicated  to  the  Lord. 
All  must  some  time  this  journey  take 
Across  innumerable  Isles  that  lie 
Beyond  the  border  of  this  Emerald  Star — 
Beyond  the  Ken  of  Man  to  describe. 
The  Sublime  Glories  of  that  Eternal  Day 
Which  God  has  set  apart 
For  Him  who  years  ago  paved  the  way — 
Jesus  of  Nazareth,  our  Master,  Christ  and 

Lord. 

To  Him  all  praises  are  sung 
In  this  Glorious  Isle  so  far  away, 
Where  All  listen  to  His  Wondrous  Wisdom 
No  Mortal  tongue  could  sufficiently  praise. 
To  Him  is  dedicated  this  Isle  of  Diamond  rays, 
This  Crystal  City  so  filled  with  Love  Divine, 
To  Him  who  so  long  ago  pointed  the  Way 
That  All  might  Know  the  path  to  the  Eternal 
Day. 


God  is  the  Center — the  Unit  around  which  grav- 
itates All  there  is — ever  was — ever  will  be.  All 
Centers  or  Suns — All  Systems,  All  Worlds  and 
Systems  of  Worlds  and  Systems  of  Suns.  God  is 
ONE — Undivided  Sphere — Revealing  Himself  in 
Manifestation  as  dual  in  expression.  The 

21 


The  Positive  and  Negative  principles — 
The  Creative  and  Generic. 

The  Sacred  Uncreate  Center  of  All  Centers  is 
God.  Represented  in  all  Ancient  Conceptions  as 
0.  M.  or  A.  U.  M.  The  Ever  Brooding  Divine 
Eternal  Infinite  Breath  or  "Holy  Spirit"  embody- 
ing the  Masculine  and  the  Feminine. 

All  Ancient  Religions  Symbolized  the  Dual  ex- 
pression of  Deity  as  God — Goddess — as  Co-equal 
in  Divine  Power  and  Divine  Love  in  All  Life.  In 
Egyptian  Lore,  the  Masculine  Divinity  was  sym- 
bolized in  Osiris  representing  the  Sun  of  Light — 
the  Creative  Power — and  Isis  was  veiled  as  the 
Divine  Mother — and  worshiped  as  Generic  Life. 
The  Holy  Spirit  is  Pure  Light — Uncreate — Infinite 
Power — Wisdom — Love.  God  is  the  Infinite  En- 
tity— the  Soul  a  finite  Entity.  Spirit  or  Con- 
sciousness is  the  Inner  Light  of  the  Soul.  Spirit 
Breathes  in  and  out  through  every  pore  of  the 
physical  body — as  well  as  the  Soul  body — through 
the  lungs — and  nervous  system.  Spirit  is  pure 
Light  and  its  contact  with  Matter  produces  Life. 

The  Soul  is  the  Only  conscious  Entity  except 
God,  who  is  the  Infinite  Entity.  The  Conscious- 
ness of  God  and  the  Consciousness  of  the  Soul 
constitutes  All  Consciousness.  The  Soul  is  the 
finite  Entity  being  limited.  Through  its  own 
desire  caused  by  the  impelling  power  within  the 
Soul  has  plunged  into  Manifestation — for  the  pur- 
pose of  expanding  its  scope  of  Consciousness. 


22 


The  same  impelling  Power  that  causes  God  to 
reveal  Himself  in  His  two  fold  manifestations  in 
Nature  is  wthin  the  Soul,  causing  the  Soul  to  seek 
expression  and  manifest  its  two  fold  Nature  as 
male  and  female.  Plato  knew  the  truth  when  he 
said:  "Every  Soul  is  only  a  half  Soul — male  and 
female  are  One  Soul.  As  the  Soul  descends  from 
its  Divine  State  it  separates  as  male  and  female, 
which  has  always  been  portrayed 

(Cherubim  (male)       (  Seraphim  (female) 
as  (  ( 

(     Wisdom  (Love  Conscious- 

ness without  form :  neither  God  nor  Matter.  The 
Soul  in  its  Absolute  State  is  Perfect — Pure — can- 
not be  destroyed  or  changed  through  manifesta- 
tion in  Matter — always  has  its  being  in  God,  the 
Infinite  Spirit  and  its  existence  in  the  Universe. 
The  Soul  being  a  spark  from  the  Infinite  Fountain 
of  Life  (God)  is  the  same  in  quality,  but  not  in 
quantity,  just  as  a  drop  of  water  taken  from  the 
Pacific  Ocean  would  be  the  same  in  Essence  and 
quality,  yet  could  never  be  the  ocean.  The  Soul 
is  a  Finite  Entity  in  the  Ocean  of  Life  and  can 
never  be  God — only  like  unto  God.  The  Same  At- 
tributes and  Powers  are  within  the  Soul  in  a 
Finite  degree.  In  its  Individualized  expression,  it 
is  governed  by  its  Individualized  Power  directed 
by  the  Will  of  God — evolving  more  and  more  of 
its  Divine  attributes.  All  of  nature  has  worked 
for  ages  and  ages  to  bring  about  the  Individual- 
ized Conscious  Entity  we  call  Man.  As  the  Sun  is 


23 


the  Center  around  which  gravitate  His  family  of 
planets  which  constitutes  our  Solar  System — So 
the  Soul  is  the  Center  of  Man  around  which  are 
entwined  the  Vibrations  of  its  atmosphere  cen- 
tered through  the  physical  form  constituting  the 
Human  System — a  miniature  world  of  His  own 
creation. 

Besides  this  physical  expression  of  life  there  is 
a  Psychical  experssion  and  its  gradations  and 
various  degrees  of  Consciousness.  As  this  Mate- 
rial World  is  so  well  adapted  for  the  Soul's  exper- 
iences in  its  present  degree  of  Consciousness 
while  functioning  through  this  gross  physical 
body,  so  God,  in  His  Wisdom,  has  arranged  a  suit- 
able world  for  Man  while  functioning  in  his  finer 
body. 

There  was  a  time  when  this  planet  was  asleep 
in  the  bosom  of  the  Solar  Nebulae — then  finally 
came  to  birth  as  a  gaseous  luminous  mass  whirl- 
ing through  space  with  tremendous  rapidity. 
Millions  of  years  passed  by  ere  in  its  cooling  and 
condensation  it  became  sufficiently  transformed 
to  permit  life  to  manifest  itself  in  its  most  rudi- 
mentary aspects — the  first  organic  forms  of  pro- 
toplasm— the  first  aggregation  of  cells — the  pro- 
tozoons — the  zoophites — the  plant  animals — the 
gellatinous  Substance  of  the  still  warm  seas  were 
succeeded  by  the  fishes — the  reptiles — the  birds — 
the  mamals  and  lastly  Man,  who  now  occupies  the 
top-most  round  of  the  geneological  tree  and 
crowns  the  animal  Kingdom.  The  history  of  this 


24 


planet  is  the  history  of  life  with  all  its  metama- 
phorsis. 

It  is  not  our  intention  to  discuss  the  evolution 
of  the  physical  structure  of  this  planet — nor  the 
evolution  of  the  Spark  from  the  time  it  left  its 
Infinite  Cradle  to  plunge  into  manifestation — 
evolving  in  every  plane  and  every  Kingdom  of  life 
until  it  became  the  Individualized  Conscious  En- 
tity we  call  Man — having  plunged  into  manifesta- 
tion that  it  may  see  itself  reflected  in  the  Mirror 
of  Nature — to  Evolve  its  Potentialities — Possibil- 
ities or  Power  from  within — attaining  higher  and 
higher  degrees  of  Consciousness — that  the  mind 
may  conquer  Nature  instead  of  being  controlled 
by  it — rather,  we  are  considering  the  Evolution 
of  the  Soul  from  the  time  it  leaves  its  physical 
body — to  make  the  change  called  death — that  it 
may  continue  life  in  the  Ethereal  World — begin- 
ning where  it  left  off  here  to  give  expression  on 
higher  planes  of  activity — and  in  higher  rates  of 
Vibration. 

When  this  planet  was  a  gaseous,  molten  lumin- 
ous mass  in  its  cooling  and  condensation  was 
formed  the  Vapor — the  Atmosphere — and  this 
crust  upon  which  we  are  now  dwelling — at  the 
same  time  the  Ethereal  or  Spiritual  part  of  this 
Mass  concentrated  into  the  Ethereal  Zones  which 
we  call  the  Ethereal  World. 

This  Ethereal  or  Spiritual  part  of  this  Mass  is 
the  Cause  and  this  Material  crust  and  all  else  is 
its  Effect  and  counterpart. 


25 


Our  Earth  and  all  planets  as  well  as  All  Suns 
have  their  Invisible  Aural  Zones  or  spheres  with 
their  various  gradations.  The  Aural  Zones  cor- 
respond in  chemical  constituents  and  rate  of 
Vibration  with  the  various  conditions  and  grada- 
tions of  the  Soul's  progression. 

We  will  now  speak  of  the  Soul  in  its  state  of  ex- 
pression in  matter — not  in  its  Absolute  state. 
When  we  speak  of  the  Soul  we  mean  Spirit  Con- 
sciousness, Mind — its  aural  envelope  as  its  Ema- 
nation which  radiates  from  the  Spirit — as  its 
atmosphere — or  garment  of  the  Spirit.  This 
atmosphere  is  the  register  of  our  thoughts,  acts 
and  deeds,  which  leave  their  distinct  impressions. 
As  we  mingle  with  others,  their  vibration  inter- 
mingling with  ours,  changes  the  quality  of  our 
vibration.  In  its  Absolute  and  original  state  the 
Soul  is  perfect — pure,  uncreate — in  its  manifesta- 
tions through  matter  it  attracts  unto  itself  sub- 
stance in  its  various  vibrations  from  every  plane 
through  which  it  passes,  causing  the  outer  gar- 
ments to  become  rechemicalized  in  every  plane  of 
life. 

Through  our  thoughts,  acts  and  deeds,  we  either 
refine  and  purify  this  substance  which  the  Soul 
has  attracted  unto  itself  in  its  expression  through 
matter — or  we  cause  it  to  become  cloudy  and 
dense. 

Spirit  is  the  Electric  Vibrator  and  Motor  of  the 
Soul — Consciousness  is  the  light  of  the  Soul — the 
Mind  is  the  objectified  part  of  Spirit;  that  Con- 

26 


sciousness  which  functions  through  the  physical 
avenues,  being  attracted  outward  to  material 
things.  It  is  the  contact  of  the  Mind  with  the 
physical  vibrations  that  produces  thoughts.  The 
Soul  in  its  absolute  state  is  like  the  pure  light  of 
the  Sun  and  the  Mind  like  the  rays  of  the  Sun. 
The  Mind,  being  attracted  by  material  Vibrations, 
creates  desires  for  material  things,  causing  the 
Mind  to  think  these  are  permanent  and  real.  It 
is  only  through  experience  and  growth  that  we 
perceive  the  Real  and  realize  the  difference  be- 
tween that  which  is  temporary  and  that  which  is 
Eternal.  Spirit  Knows — the  Mind  thinks,  the 
Mind  must  be  controlled  and  directed.  In  other 
words  you  are  not  the  Mind,  neither  are  you  the 
body — you  are  that  which  has  brought  about  the 
Mind  and  the  Physical  body.  You  are  Spirit — 
the  Electric  Vibrator,  that  energizing  force  which 
breathes  in  and  out  through  the  physical  body — 
the  pores — the  lungs — the  nervous  system.  The 
Mind  is  the  outflow  of  the  Spirit  manifesting 
through  the  physical  avenues  and  the  Soul  is  the 
radiation — the  atmosphere  and  clothing  or  gar- 
ment of  the  Spirit  in  which  is  registered  all  our 
thoughts,  our  acts,  our  deeds.  When  we  speak  of 
the  Soul  in  its  expression  on  this  planet,  we  mean 
Spirit — Mind  and  its  garments. 

Again,  as  our  Sun  is  the  Center  around  which 
gravitate  its  family  of  planets  so  the  Soul  of  Man 
is  the  center  of  the  human  System,  around  which 
are  entwined  the  vibrations  of  its  atmosphere, 


27 


which  registers  its  thoughts,  acts  and  deeds — and 
as  the  human  system  is  engirdled  by  an  aural 
sphere  in  which  are  designated  its  various  gar- 
ments, so  our  Earth  is  engirdled  in  its  aural 
spheres,  designated  as  the  Zones  with  their 
gradations.  In  these  aural  Zones  which  engirdle 
our  Earth,  we  find  every  phase  of  Social  and  Men- 
tal development — we  find  the  Domestic — the  In- 
ventive, the  Musical  and  Scholarly  Zones — the 
Heavenly  or  Spiritual — the  Celestial  or  Divine 
Kingdoms.  Every  zone  corresponds  in  its  rate  of 
Vibration  and  Color  with  the  Solar  beam  in  the 
prism. 

The  Domestic,  Inventive,  Musical  and  Scholarly 
planes  are  a  great  Necessity  and  are  very  Impor- 
tant for  the  SouPs  progression,  as  they  establish 
an  opportunity  for  that  which  was  neglected  or 
the  fulfillment  of  that  which  was  not  accomplished 
while  functioning  in  the  physical  body.  The  Soul 
must  outgrow  these  Material  Vibrations  which 
have  been  created  through  its  desires  ere  it  can 
progress  to  higher  states  and  become  Fit  and  Eli- 
gible for  the  Heavenly  Zones  and  the  Celestial 
Heavens. 

Within  every  Soul  are  the  possibilities  and 
potentialities  of  an  Angel — Ruling  Angel — 
Messiah  or  Christ.  In  fact,  a  Divine  Power  not  yet 
dreamed  of  by  the  Finite  Mind  lies  within  each  and 
every  Soul  in  a  dormant  state,  which  must  be 
unfolded  through  time  and  somewhere  ere  we  can 
gravitate  to  and  habitate  God's  Heavenly  or  His 

28 


Divine  Kingdoms.  So  long  as  we  have  not  fitted 
ourselves  for  these  higher  states  we  must  go 
where  the  conditions  are  conducive  for  this  prep- 
aration after  we  leave  the  physical  body. 

When  we  leave  this  physical  body,  we  take  with 
us  our  tendencies,  our  desires  and  our  habits.  Then 
how  could  any  Soul  that  is  filled  with  obnoxious 
thoughts — of  Hate — Jealousy — Hypocrisy — Crime 
— Lust  and  Vice,  enter  or  habitate  a  Heavenly 
Zone  where  all  is  Harmony  and  Divine  Love.  We 
might  just  as  well  expect  a  fish  to  live  out  of 
water  for  any  length  of  time  on  this  earth  plane. 
The  Soul  must  become  regenerated,  transmuted 
and  purified  ere  it  can  ascend  to  the  Heavenly 
Zones  or  still  greater  heights  which  await  all. 
The  conditions  which  we  have  created  for  our- 
selves through  our  habits  and  desires  we  cannot 
escape.  These  are  the  first  to  confront  us  after 
our  transition  into  the  new  life.  We  must  travel 
through  the  Ethereal  Zones  of  this  planet  ere  we 
can  expect  to  find  the  still  greater  opportunities 
or  the  still  more  perfected  states  or  expressions 
of  life.  How  could  any  one  expect  to  be  a  trav- 
eller or  dweller  on  other  planets  or  explore  other 
System  of  Worlds  so  long  as  he  has  not  mastered 
the  conditions  on  this  planet  or  have  become 
Master  of  Self. 

These  Ethereal  Zones  around  our  planet  with 
their  various  gradations  and  environments  are 
just  as  tangible  and  as  real  to  the  Soul  and  its 
senses  as  are  our  present  conditions  and  environ- 

29 


ments  on  this  Earth  realm  real  and  tangible  to 
our  physical  senses. 

These  Ethereal  Zones  extend  around  this 
planet  revolving  through  space  with  the  same 
rapidity  as  the  planet.  They  extend  out  some 
thousands  of  miles,  but  not  to  Eternity — for  it 
must  be  remembered  that  all  planets,  all  Suns, 
have  their  Ethereal  Zones — and  the  Moon  has  its 
chemical  conditions  and  gaseous  spheres. 

Now  let  us  think  of  our  atmosphere  which  we 
breathe,  extending  to  a  certain  radius  and  above 
this  is  a  gaseous  belt  extending  out  some  distance 
— next  to  this  is  the  Electric  belt  and  then  comes 
the  Etheric  belt.  Now,  between  this  Electric  and 
Etheric  belt  lies  the  First  inhabited  Zone.  This 
Zone  is  one  hundred  thousand  miles  from  this 
Earth.  It  is  forty  thousand  miles  wide.  Every 
Zone  has  its  chemical  conditions  and  heated  gases 
of  the  Sun,  causing  a  space  of  Ten  Thousand  miles 
between  every  Zone. 

This  space  of  ten  thousand  miles  between  each 
Zone  is  not  empty  space — as  there  is  no  such  thing 
as  empty  space ;  it  is  only  apparently  so,  and  if  we 
were  attuned  to  its  Vibrations,  we  would  be  cog- 
nizant of  its  conditions. 

Next  to  this  space  lies  the  Second  Zone  and  its 
chemical  conditions  and  heated  gases,  and  next 
to  this  lies  the  Third  Zone  with  its  chemical  con- 
ditions and  heated  gases.  Then  comes  the  Moon, 
which  lies  between  the  Third  and  Fourth  Zones, 
and  next  to  the  Fourth  Zone  and  its  cehmical  con- 


30 


ditions  and  heated  gases  comes  the  Fifth  Zone — 
and  then  the  Sixth  and  then  the  Seventh,  which 
is  the  Top-most  round  of  our  planet,  in  which  we 
function  ere  we  can  have  a  period  of  rest  or 
inactivity.  Then  comes  the  First  and  Second 
Celestial  Kingdoms  and  the  Third  Celestial  King- 
dom is  the  Fountain  of  Bliss. 

Some  of  the  Zones  vary  in  width  on  account  of 
the  passing  of  other  planets.  In  such  places  they 
would  vary  from  two  to  five  thousand  miles. 

Our  Moon  is  240,000  miles  from  our  Earth.  The 
First  inhabited  Zone  is        100,000  Miles  from  here 
First  inhabited  Zone  is          40,000  Miles  wide. 
First  inhabited  Zone  is         10,000  Miles  space  be- 
tween   First 
and  2nd. 


Second  inhabited  Zone  is     150,000  Miles  from  here 
Second  inhabited  Zone  is       40,000  Miles  wide. 
Second  inhabited  Zone  is       10,000  Miles  space. 


Third  inhabited  Zone  is       200,000  Miles. 
Third  inhabited  Zone  is         30,000  Miles  wide. 
Third  inhabited  Zone  is         10,000  Miles  space. 


To  the  Moon  240,000  Miles. 

The  Moon's  Aural  sphere      60,OOOMiles  wide. 


The  Fourth  inhabited  zone  300,000  Miles. 
The  Fourth  inhabited  zone    40,000  Miles  wide. 
The  Fourth  inhabited  zone    10,000  Miles  space. 


31 


The  Fifth  inhabited  zone    350,000  Miles. 
The  Fifth  inhabited  zone      40,000  Miles  wide. 
The  Fifth  inhabited  zone      10,000  Miles  space. 


The  Sixth  inhabited  zone    400,000  Miles. 
The  Sixth  inhabited  zone      40,000  Miles  wide. 
The  Sixth  inhabited  zone       10,000  Miles  space. 


The  Seventh  inhabited  zone  450,000  Miles. 
The  Seventh  inhabited  zone  40,000  Miles  wide. 
The  Seventh  inhabited  zone  10,000  Miles  space 


First  Celestial  Kingdom    500,000  Miles  from  here 
First  Celestial  Kingdom    100,000  Miles  space  and 

width. 


Second  Celestial  Kingdom  600,000  Miles. 
Second  Celestial  Kingdom  400,000  Miles  space  and 

width. 


Third  Celestial  Kingdom  1,000,000  Miles. 

In  these  intervening  spaces  are  wonderful 
mountain  ranges,  oceans,  ravines,  streams,  lakes, 
sandy  beds,  waterfalls,  cataracts,  trees,  shrubbery 
and  wild  flowers. 

While  the  inhabitants  of  the  world  of  Soul  do 
not  dwell  in  these  parts,  they  ramble  or  stroll 
through  here  for  an  outing  or  investigation,  or  to 
be  alone  to  enjoy  the  wonderful  freaks  of  Nature. 
Here  the  friends  or  teachers  bring  the  New-born 
Souls  just  as  we  take  strangers  to  our  Mountains 


32 


and  Lakes  and  resorts  to  show  them  the  varieties 
and  beauties  of  our  country  that  they  may  enjoy 
these  interesting  wonders. 

While  these  Zones  blend  into  each  other,  yet 
they  are  distinctly  separate  and  apart — not  by  a 
mere  boundary  line — but  by  what  we  would  call 
peculiar  freaks  of  Nature — caused  by  its  chemical 
conditions  and  heated  gases  of  the  Sun.  In  the 
scale  of  ascension,  the  atmosphere  of  every  Zone 
is  more  Ethereal — of  a  higher  rate  of  Vibration. 
The  Lower  Zones  being  the  densest  and  of  lower 
Vibrations. 

There  are  Seven  Zones  and  Seven  Gradations  in 
every  Zone  and  this  constitutes  the  World  of  Soul 
around  our  planet  which  we  call  the  Ethereal 
World — through  which  all  dwellers  of  the  Earth 
must  pass.  As  none  can  escape  this  journey,  it 
behooves  you  to  become  acquainted  with  this 
Unseen  or  Unknown  World,  that  you  will  not 
be  a  stranger  in  a  strange  land,  not  knowing 
which  way  to  turn  or  what  to  do.  To  know  of  this 
world  should  be  the  most  important,  the  most 
Vital  of  All  Knowledge,  as  it  concerns  each  and 
every  Soul,  from  which  none  can  escape  and  some 
time  must  imbibe  its  Truth  and  come  face  to  face 
with  these  facts. 

Seldom  does  any  one  gravitate  to  the  Fourth 
Zone  at  death.  You  can  go  out  beyond  our  planet 
and  other  planets  in  your  journeys  while  the  cord 
is  not  yet  severed — if  you  are  fitted  for  such  jour- 

33 


neys.  The  ordinary  individual  could  not  dwell  be- 
yond the  Third  Zone — the  atmosphere  is  so  very 
Ethereal  and  your  Soul  would  not  Vibrate  in  har- 
mony with  it  and  you  would  have  to  become  attuned 
ere  you  could  exist  in  its  vibration — not  only  this, 
but  you  must  know  its  laws  and  be  capable  of  ful- 
filling the  requirements  of  this  Zone.  It  is  a  very 
rare  occurrance  for  any  individual  to  ascend  to 
the  Fourth  Zone  immediately  after  leaving  the 
physical  body. 

The  majority  of  people  are  fitted  for  the  Second 
Zone.  While  those  who  have  become  sufficiently 
unfolded  through  Service  or  good  deeds  and  have 
become  awakened  and  have  sufficient  Knowledge 
of  the  Law  of  Evolution  and  Vibration  gravitate 
to  the  Third  Zone. 

We  can  obtain  sufficient  knowledge  and  unsel- 
fishly serve  humanity — sufficiently  unfolding  the 
light  within  to  make  us  eligible  for  the  Fifth 
Zone — and  such  at  death  would  gravitate  to  the 
Third — then  to  the  Fourth,  gathering  in  each  Zone 
that  which  was  neglected  and  then  in  a  very  short 
time  enter  the  Fifth.  If  you  could  see  this  Zone 
with  its  advantages  and  Glorious  Beauty — you 
would  desire  to  linger  here  indefinitely. 

There  are  a  very  few  exceptions  where  indi- 
viduals have  attained  the  Knowledge — understood 
the  Law  and  unselfishly  served  humanity — such 
gravitated  to  the  Fourth,  then  rapidly  passed 
through  the  Fifth  to  the  Sixth.  Such  was  the 
case  with  that  great  Hindoo  Master  so  well  konwn 

34 


throughout  this  world  as  Swami  Vivikananda, 
who  was  an  Unusually  Highly  Evolved,  Enlight- 
ened Soul,  whose  Wonderful  Message  and  Unsel- 
fish Service  to  humanity  will  never  be  forgotten. 
This  great  Soul  gravitated  to  the  Fourth  Zone  and 
in  less  than  two  years,  passed  to  the  Sixth  Zone; 
which  is  considered  remarkable  in  the  Soul  World. 
Swami  Vivikananda  is  now  a  dweller  in  the  Sev- 
enth Zone.  Seventy-five  years  is  considered  a 
very  short  time  for  any  soul  to  progress  to  the 
Seventh  Zone — beginning  at  the  first  round  on  the 
ladder  of  life  in  our  ascension,  which  is  in  the 
Third  Zone. 

The  one  question  which  has  been  uppermost  in 
all  Minds  throughout  the  ages  has  been  from 
whence  have  we  come  and  whither  do  we  go  and 
what  is  the  purpose  of  life,  which  is  gradually 
revealed  in  our  march  of  progression  through 
these  various  Zones  in  this  Ethereal  World.  All 
who  have  progressed  to  the  Seventh  Zone  know 
where  they  go  and  from  whence  they  have  come. 

The  Ethereal  World  is  organized  and  governed 
by  God's  Laws  through  Justice  and  Divine  Love. 
All  works  and  all  results  are  dedicated  to  the 
Lord — praises  to  the  Lord  Echo  and  reverberate 
Everywhere  in  All  His  Kingdoms.  There  are 
Rulers  and  Teachers  and  Masters  in  every  Zone — 
the  Rulers  are  considered  among  the  Highest  of 
God's  Messengers  and  Helpers  whose  Divine  Love 
and  Wisdom  is  felt  and  reverenced  by  all  the 
Dwellers  of  every  Zone.  The  most  tender,  Kindly 


35 


consideration  is  shown  every  Soul  regardless  of  its 
mistakes — state  or  position — and  every  dweller 
clings  to  these  Rulers,  Teachers  and  Masters  as  a 
child  to  a  parent,  realizing  they  are  pointing  the 
Way.  These  Intelligences  or  Souls  of  Wisdom  are 
so  Holy  and  Sacred  that  the  Finite  Mind  could  not 
perceive  Their  Power — their  Wisdom  and  their 
Love. 

So  long  as  the  Finite  Mind  cannot  comprehend 
the  possibility  of  the  existence  of  such  Sacred 
Souls — how  could  you  have  any  conception  of  the 
Holiness  and  Power  of  God,  who  is  Infinite  ? 

We  only  know  God  through  His  manifestations 
and  His  Handiwork  and  see  His  Power  in  back  of 
all  there  is.  Man  can  only  perceive  God  as  he 
unfolds  higher  degrees  of  Consciousness,  which 
Light  reveals  God  to  his  Soul. 

So  long  as  we  are  not  able  to  sense  higher  rates 
of  Vibrations  than  those  which  our  physical  senses 
respond  to,  we  could  not  expect  to  gravitate  to  a 
Zone  whose  Vibrations  are  so  much  higher  than 
these  to  which  we  are  attuned  to  on  this  material 
realm.  We  could  not  exist  in  an  environment  that 
is  not  adapted  and  attuned  to  us — or  to  which  we 
are  not  attuned. 

We  are  rather  dumbfounded  or  completely  over- 
whelmed when  we  first  learn  of  the  facts  concern- 
ing our  requirements  after  we  leave  this  physical 
body  and  make  the  change  called  death.  We  have 
been  so  accustomed  to  thinking  that  we  go  to 
heaven,  with  its  golden  streets  and  harps  and 

36 


there  find  God  on  a  throne  to  judge  us — either  to 
condemn  us  or  fold  us  in  His  bosom — so  that  the 
facts  that  we  must  become  purified  and  regener- 
ated and  that  much  else  is  required  of  us  ere  we 
can  go  to  any  Heavenly  Kingdom  is  rather  appall- 
ing to  the  undeveloped  Soul.  However,  the  sooner, 
we  awaken  to  the  realization  of  the  Facts  concern- 
ing our  Being,  the  easier  and  better  it  will  be  for 
us.  And  the  sooner  we  get  acquainted  v/ith  the 
Country  through  which  we  all  must  travel,  the 
easier  will  be  our  journey  and  the  better  will  be 
the  conditions  that  confront  us  on  our  arrival  in 
this  Land  of  the  Soul  that  is  so  little  known — all 
because  of  the  superstitions  and  Selfish,  Individ- 
ualized, Centralized  Interests  of  the  Many  on  tins 
Earth  realm.  BUT  no  MORE  Shall  the  Truth  Be 
With-held,  for  All  Who  Come  in  Contact  with 
These  Pages  Will  Be  So  Uplifted  and  Benefited 
That  They  Will  Spread  the  Glad  Tidings  All  Over 
This  World  Until  They  Will  Permeate  Every 
Home— and  ALL  WILL  KNOW  THERE  IS  NO 
DEATH. 


37 


FIRST  INHABITED  ZONE  OF  THE  ETHEREAL 
WORLD 

One  Hundred  Thousand  Miles  from  this  Earth 
Realm. 

Thou  Holy  God,  Thou  who  art  the  Spirit  of  Man- 
ifestation; manifest  Thyself  in  us  day  by  day. 
May  Thy  Light  so  penetrate  our  Souls  that  it  may 
transmute  the  darknes  and  quicken  the  Spark  of 
Divine  Love  within  until  its  dynamic  Power  will 
consume  all  Selfishness  and  hatred  within  our 
hearts,  lifting  us  into  a  Consciousness  of  Thy 
Being  that  we  may  grow  nearer  and  nearer  to 
Thee  and  by  and  by  feel  Thy  Spirit  Breath  and  en- 
joy the  glories  and  blessings  of  Thy  Eternal  Light. 

This  Zone  lies  between  the  Electric  and  Etheric 
belts  and  is  called  the  Shadow  Zone.  Here  it  is 
never  light.  It  is  between  twilight  and  total  dark- 
ness and  is  of  a  very  low  rate  of  Vibration.  The 
octopus  which  is  found  here  in  the  Pacific  Ocean, 
when  threatened  with  danger  evolves  or  emits  a 


38 


dark  cloud  then  sneaks  away  and  leaves  the  dark 
cloud  behind. 

Some  individuals  create  a  dark  cloud  around 
their  Being  through  their  daily  thoughts  and  acts, 
casting  their  shadows  before  them — and  the 
deeds  of  many  have  left  their  shadows  behind 
them.  This  cloudy  garment  which  they  have  cre- 
ated, follows  them  where  e're  they  go.  This 
shadow  is  the  first  to  greet  them  in  the  World  of 
Soul.  Since  God  has  provided  suitable  places  for 
the  Soul,  in  its  various  conditions  and  states  of 
evolution  through  time,  we  find  here  suitable  hab- 
itation for  the  Individuals  who  have  wDven  into 
the  warp  and  woof  of  their  life,  the  dark  clouds  of 
materiality  through  their  selfishness,  jealousy, 
hatred,  revenge,  malice,  vice  and  brutality. 

The  dense  cloudy  atmosphere  of  the  beings  who 
inhabit  this  Zone  corresponds  to  the  chemical  con- 
dition and  rate  of  vibration  of  the  dense  Substance 
of  this  Zone. 

This  dense,  dark  substance  which  they  have 
woven  around  themselves  does  not  permit  the 
light  to  enter  their  Being  and  obstructs  from  their 
view  all  that  is  good  and  all  that  is  Divine.  This 
Element  causes  the  Soul  to  contract,  shrivel  up, 
while  the  light  within  is  perfectly  dormant.  In 
this  state  of  lethargy,  many  can  not  be  aroused 
except  through  a  terrible  roar  like  that  of  a  can- 
non or  some  terrible  shock.  It  is  as  tRough  these 
elements  have  become  chrystalized  or  petrified  so 
that  many  of  them  are  not  conscious  of  anything 


39 


but  fear  and  terror  which  haunts  their  Soul.  All 
of  their  atcs  and  deeds  are  continually  before  them 
and  this  is  worse  than  any  hell  that  man  could 
picture  or  has  been  pictured  through  the  Ortho- 
dox Mind.  In  this  Zone  are  found  many  mountains 
and  caves  and  rivers — and  the  roaring,  thundering 
waters  of  an  ocean.  Some  of  the  caves  are  dark 
as  dungeons  with  their  stalactites  and  stalagmites 

Many  of  these  dwellers  will  hide  in  their  caves 
or  lie  down  flat  on  the  ground  behind  dense  bushes 
of  shrubbery,  always  in  fear,  quivering,  trembling. 
Others,  who  are  not  quite  so  caloused,  live  in  little 
huts  with  wooden  tables  and  benches ;  spend  their 
time  with  the  same  crude  amusements,  only  in  a 
modified  form,  playing  cards  as  they  did  on  the 
Earth  realm,  having  their  pet  animals  always  at 
their  side.  They  roam  around  the  mountains, 
watching  the  fishes  and  the  animals.  They  amuse 
themselves  greatly  with  the  numerous  animals 
found  in  this  Zone.  They  do  not  realize  that  noth- 
ing propagates — nothing  dies  in  the  Ethereal 
World — they  do  not  realize  they  are  creating  for 
themselves  that  which  they  desire.  They  do  not 
realize  they  have  created  their  condition  and  their 
environments — in  fact,  many  of  them  do  not  real- 
ize that  they  have  passed  out  of  their  physical 
body  and  are  existing  in  their  Soul  body. 

If  those  on  this  Earth  realm  who  are  living  a 
life  of  Deception,  or  Selfishness ;  a  life  of  Vice  and 
brutality  and  Crime,  could  for  a  moment  see 
these  deformed  Souls  in  their  tattered,  stained 


40 


garments,  it  would  leave  such  an  indelible  impres- 
sion that  they  would  reform  and  change  their 
mode  of  living  while  yet  in  their  physical  body. 

They  would  pray  for  guidance  and  help  that 
they  may  become  cleansed  and  purified  and  make 
an  effort  to  overcome  or  work  out  their  conditions 
here  on  this  Earth  realm.  They  would  abandon 
their  life  of  lust  and  crime  and  lift  themselves  out 
of  the  black  clouds  they  gather  around  themselves. 

There  are  those  who  have  entered  here  who 
regret  their  mistakes  and  immediately  seek  to 
know  how  they  can  compensate  for  their  awful 
deeds — and  such  attract  to  themselves  Benefi- 
cent Souls  from  the  Higher  Zones  who  teach  them 
and  show  them  how  to  lift  themselves  out  of  their 
environments.  Such  soon  see  a  ray  of  light  and 
hope  fills  their  Soul  and  like  a  tiger  after  his  prey, 
they  reach  out  towards  the  light  and  lose  no  time 
in  extricating  themselves  from  the  darkness  and 
barren  conditions  of  this  Zone.  When  they 
have  sufficiently  cleansed  and  purified  themselves, 
they  breathe  a  sigh  of  relief  and  openly  and  loudly 
thank  God  for  the  light:  They  fall  at  the  feet  of 
the  Divine  Angel  who  has  shown  them  the  way. 
Their  Soul  becomes  quickened  with  love  and  appre- 
ciation— never  to  be  forgotten. 

When  the  light  dawns  in  such  a  Soul,  then  he 
sees  his  tattered,  stained  garments  and  as  he 
becomes  aware  of  his  condition,  he  immediately 
rushes  to  the  nearest  fountain  of  water — stands 
under  its  beneficent  sprays  trying  to  wash  out  the 

41 


stains  in  his  garment — while  grief  is  aroused  in 
his  present  state  of  consciousness.  He  is  not  yet 
aware  that  all  his  regrets  and  grief  will  multiply 
in  his  awakening  and  can  only  be  overcome 
through  good  thoughts,  good  deeds  through  un- 
selfish Service  to  those  who  are  in  the  same  con- 
dition. Such  will  be  his  mission  until  such  time 
as  he  has  earned  his  own  salvation.  In  these  expe- 
riences he  will  learn  that  Divine  Love  is  the  only 
Redeeming  Power  of  all  Life. 

This  is  indeed  a  field  for  purification  and  atone- 
ment, as  God's  laws  are  Immutable  and  Unchange- 
able. Throughout  the  ages,  Man  has  ben  taught 
that  we  must  suffer  for  our  Sins — and  that  God 
punishes  those  who  do  evil  and  are  wicked — by 
casting  them  into  a  fiery  furnace  or  some  bottom- 
less pit — but  in  the  world  of  Soul  we  come  face  to 
face  with  facts  and  all  conditions.  We  find  that 
there  is  a  purpose  in  this  expression  of  life  and 
that  God  has  provided  equal  opportunities  if  we 
comply  with  His  Laws;  and  if  we  work  against 
His  Law,  instead  of  abiding  by  it,  we  suffer  for 
our  mistakes.  We  learn  that  we  are  Creators  and 
have  created  our  own  conditions — our  own  destiny 
and  that  we  have  punished  ourselves.  We  learn 
that  God's  laws  are  such  that  every  action  has  its 
reaction — every  thought  is  a  seed  Sown  which 
bears  fruit  of  its  own  kind,  and  we  are  the  ones 
who  must  gather  the  harvest  we  have  sown — 
whether  it  be  sorrow  and  grief — joy  and  bless- 
ings; we  suffer  for  our  mistakes  not  as  a  matter 


42 


of  punishment  but  as  the  Effect  of  a  Cause,  for 
God's  Law  is  set  in  motion  through  our  thinking 
and  our  doings  and  rebounds  upon  ourselves  in  the 
world  of  Soul  as  well  as  on  this  Earth  realm. 

In  the  Ethereal  World  we  are  face  to  face  with 
ourselves  and  with  God's  Laws.  Our  conditions 
stand  out  plainly  and  the  Highly  Illumined  Intel- 
ligences can  see  and  know  just  where  we  stand 
and  all  our  mistakes.  Out  of  pure  sympathy  and 
Divine  Love,  which  they  have  for  All — realizing 
how  sacred  unto  God  is  every  Soul,  they  descend 
to  this  dark  Zone  to  show  them  the  light. 
When  they  see  these  Illumined  Intelligences  ap- 
proaching, they  run  and  hide — fear  and  terror  of 
the  Law  is  constantly  before  their  consciousness, 
so  they  imagine  every  Soul  they  see  is  after  them. 

Many  times,  beautiful,  sublime  Souls  descend 
with  their  harps  to  play  and  sing ;  that  they  may 
touch  the  proper  key  of  their  Soul  and  through 
this  harmony  quicken  the  tender  cord  of  Divine 
Love.  Oftimes  they  quietly  crawl  out  from  their 
places  of  hiding  to  listen  to  these  beautiful  strains 
of  music  and  when  they  touch  the  proper  key, 
they  draw  nearer  and  pray — then  they  are  wiling 
to  listen  and  be  led. 

The  Divine  Angel  who  suddenly  appears  before 
him,  assures  him  there  is  a  way  out  of  this  dark- 
ness, that  leads  to  the  Light  of  Day,  and  assures 
them  that  the  way  is  opened  through  their  Desire 
to  do  Good  for  every  Evil  Thought  and  Act. 

On  this  earth  realm,  Man  is  governed  and  order 

43 


is  attained  by  man-made  laws,  while  in  the  World 
of  the  Soul  All  is  governed  and  Order  is  established 
through  God's  Divine  Law  of  Love. 

When  these  dwellers  are  shown  the  way — and 
they  learn  that  it  is  through  unselfish  service  and 
through  Kindness  and  Good  Will  to  All  that  they 
can  earn  their  Salvation,  they  are  sent  on  their 
way  rejoicing — and  surprising  to  themselves  are 
the  fruits  of  their  labor.  They  look  in  astonish- 
ment upon  the  fruition  of  kindly  acts  and  loving 
thoughts  and  wonder  why  they  had  never  known 
or  thought  of  God's  Laws  before.  The  gratitude 
such  Beings  manifest  after  they  have  progressed 
out  of  the  darkness,  as  they  are  constantly  wit- 
nessing the  results  of  their  efforts  to  do  good,  is 
unspeakable.  They  are  absolutely  untiring  in  their 
efforts  to  uplift  some  Being  who  is  still  struggling 
in  the  darkness. 

No  Mortal  Being  has  a  conception  of  the  Power 
of  Divine  Love  and  how  unselfishly  this  Power  is 
showered  upon  those  in  the  Lower  Zones  by  the 
Angels  and  Messengers  from  the  Higher  Heavenly 
Zones — who  understand  God's  Laws  and  how  ten- 
derly and  lovingly  they  show  the  way — teaching 
them  how  to  uplift  themselves,  that  they  may 
climb  the  ladder  of  life  and  behold  the  glories  and 
grandeur  of  God's  Handiwork. 

Every  effort  is  made  to  awaken  these  unfortu- 
nate Souls.  At  regular  intervals  in  this  Zone 
may  be  heard  the  roaring  sound  of  a  Trumpet  sent 
forth  by  the  Angels  of  Light,  bidding  these  Souls 

44 


Wake  up !  Arise !  And  see  the  light.  Come  forth 
out  of  your  dungeons  and  Seek  Peace  for  your 
weary  Soul. 

The  Light  of  their  Soul  being  dormant,  they  are 
asleep — entranced  by  their  own  deeds.  Many  of 
these  Beings  have  contracted  into  dwarfs — their 
features  reveal  their  brutal  deeds. 

If  you  did  not  understand  the  law  and  know 
their  conditions  you  would  not  imagine  that  these 
Beings  ever  functioned  in  a  physical  form  with 
erect  features — such  is  the  effect  of  our  thoughts, 
acts  and  deeds  upon  our  Soul. 

Many  of  them  look  as  if  they  belong  in  the 
animal  Kingdom — and  had  never  had  a  human 
form.  The  saddest  of  all  is  the  fact  that  here  are 
found  women  who  once  functioned  in  a  womanly 
form— but  now  are  seen  as  they  are — in  garments 
tattered  and  torn — and  these  too  must  awaken 
and  some  time  become  cleansed  and  purified  and 
walk  in  the  path  with  Angels.  Ages  may  pass  by 
ere  some  of  these  Beings  will  reach  the  top  round 
in  the  ladder  of  life,  but  they  must  and  will  eventu- 
ally reach  it.  Time  modifies,  then  cures  all  our 
mistakes  and  our  sufferings — and  when  these 
Souls  are  weary  of  suffering  they  cry  out  for 
Help  and  Light.  Then  and  only  then  can  they  be 
assisted. 

Such  a  cry  always  reaches  some  Beneficent 
Soul  who  with  Angel  wings  appears  before  their 
vision  and  bids  them  rise  and  follow. 

This  Zone  is  Fourty  Thousand  Miles  wide  and  is 


45 


densely  timbered  like  a  wilderness  in  some  parts — 
in  other  directions  towards  the  north  there  are 
sandy  deserts  with  scrubby  shrubbery  here  and 
there — wild  cactus — mullen  plants  and  other 
plants  are  found  here — cypress  and  other  trees 
are  seen  in  abundance  along  the  Southern  part  of 
this  Zone — while  in  the  central  portion  it  is  bar- 
ren— rocky — damp  and  musty.  The  rocks  in  the 
caves  are  covered  with  moss  and  gelatinous  sub- 
stances. Here  you  find  insects,  flees,  buzzards, 
skunks,  rats,  bears,  elephants,  tigers  and  other 
animals  throughout  this  Zone. 

In  the  Ocean  are  various  marine  plants,  ferns 
and  fishes.  The  water  is  cold  and  clammy.  In- 
stead of  this  purgatory  being  a  hot  place  it  is  a 
damp,  cold,  musty  place,  as  they  do  not  receive  the 
direct  rays  of  the  Sun.  Many  times  these  Beings 
bathe  in  these  waters,  thinking  they  can  find  relief 
for  their  tortured  Soul.  Their  haunts  are  the 
deeds  that  confront  their  vision  no  matter  where 
they  go.  There  are  no  flowers  in  this  belt.  Many 
growths  of  various  kinds  are  found  in  the  moun- 
tains around  the  streams.  The  Angels  who  de- 
scend to  these  vibrations  must  be  heavily  robed 
to  protect  themselves  from  this  atmosphere, 
which  is  repellant  to  their  Souls.  There  are  but 
very  few  huts,  as  these  dwellers  lie  down  flat  on 
the  ground  behind  bushes  or  sit  in  these  damp 
Caves  on  some  rock,  hiding  themselves. 

Some  of  these  dwellers  have  been  here  for  hun- 
dreds of  years,  while  others  remain  from  ten  to 


46 


fifty  years.  However,  time  is  not  an  element  of 
consideration  here  in  the  World  of  Soul — many  of 
them  have  no  conception  of  how  long  they  have 
lingered  here. 

There  is  a  Ruling  Angel  for  this  Zone.  He  is 
considered  in  the  World  of  Soul  as  a  Most  Power- 
ful Beneficent  Soul.  To  be  able  to  rule  the  Unruly 
and  establish  and  maintain  Peace  among  the  Law- 
less, Savage,  Brutal  Animal  Beings,  requires  by 
far  more  Wisdom  and  Power  than  the  Finite  Mind 
is  capable  of  comprehending.  To  maintain  Har- 
mony and  Peace  among  such  Beings,  who  would  on 
the  slightest  provocation,  war  with  each  other — 
in  fact,  with  the  disturbing  tendencies  and  bitter 
elements  in  their  Being  they  would  be  continually 
in  an  uproar  as  a  natural  result,  if  it  were  not  for 
the  pervading  Power  of  this  Ruling  Star,  who  is 
considered  among  the  Greatest  of  the  Great  and 
who  is  assisted  by  many  millions  of  Beneficent 
Angels  who  are  constantly  guarding  and  guiding 
these  darkened  Souls  who,  regardless  of  their  dor- 
mant state,  feel  a  Power  which  they  do  not  under- 
stand. It  is  this  Power  which  they  feel  over  them 
that  causes  these  dwellers  to  tremble  in  fear  and 
terror — and  they  are  constantly  looking  for  some- 
thing'to  happen — which  never  happens. 

Whenever  any  of  these  dwellers  scheme  among 
themselves  to  accomplish  certain  devilish  work, 
just  then,  like  a  thunderbolt,  this  Power  is  pre- 
sented to  them  in  some  manner,  to  teach  them  that 
there  is  a  Power  Greater  and  Higher  than  them- 


47 


selves  that  is  watching  over  them.  There  are 
many  various  ways  through  which  this  Power 
makes  itself  known — and  oftimes  they  will  mo- 
mentarily light  up  this  Dark  Zone  through  the 
appearance  and  the  Illumination  of  Millions  of 
Divine  Souls  at  once.  The  majority  have  learned 
that  this  light  is  not  caused  by  an  Electrical  dis- 
play, as  they  distinctly  see  the  faces  and  forms 
of  these  Angels — many  times  it  becomes  the  con- 
versation of  these  dwellers  and  they  wonder  how 
they  can  reach  these  Souls  and  put  an  end  to 
them.  There  are  those  who  through  this  mani- 
festation become  awakened — get  on  their  knees 
and  cry  to  them  for  help.  Many  are  the  tales  that 
could  be  told,  but  suffice  it  to  say — all  such  must 
serve  their  time  until  they  are  ready  to  become 
obedient  to  Divine  Law  and  undo  the  wrongs  by 
doing  good — overcome  the  evil  tendencies  through 
the  Power  of  Divine  Love. 

If  such  did  not  suffer,  they  could  not  realize  the 
suffering  they  have  caused  others.  If  they  do  not 
taste  the  bitter,  they  can  never  appreciate  the 
sweet.  If  they  did  not  know  what  struggles  and 
conflicts  and  sorrows  meant,  they  could  not  appre- 
ciate the  joys  and  blessings. 

The  dwarfed,  dark  condition  of  these  Beings,  is 
the  extreme  opposite  of  the  Angelic  state  and  the 
Darkness,  barrenness  and  the  lower  forms,  as  the 
outburst  of  this  Zone  are  the  extreme  opposite  of 
the  Heavenly,  Divine  Kingdoms  of  "Our  Father's 
House." 


48 


When  these  dwellers  have  become  sufficiently 
cleansed  and  purified  and  have  created  within 
themselves  the  Desire  to  Serve  God  and  be  Obedi- 
ent to  His  Laws,  then  they  are  led  to  a  fountain 
of  pure  water  that  gushes  forth  to  great  heights, 
which  is  concealed  from  their  view,  until  they  are 
ready  for  its  beneficent,  refreshing  sprays.  There 
is  a  path  through  a  dense  forest  that  leads  from 
the  darkness  of  the  First  Zone  to  the  twilight  of 
the  Second  Zone.  There  are  many  streams  and 
springs  and  small  bodies  of  water  in  this  forest. 
As  we  enter  this  forest,  the  darkness  gradually 
evolves  into  the  twilight,  and  near  the  entrance  of 
the  Second  Zone,  in  a  most  conducive  portion  on 
top  of  a  mountain  is  found  this  gushing  Fountain. 
Here  is  where  they  get  their  shower  bath,  stand- 
ing under  its  vibrant  sprays — causing  the  outer 
dark-stained  garment  to  slough  off — and  behold! 
They  see  themselves  for  the  first  time  in  many, 
many  years,  standing  there  in  a  perfect  human 
form  as  man  or  woman,  and  Beneficent  Angels, 
who  have  woven  suitable  raiment  for  them — 
clothe  them  in  attire  similar  to  those  worn  on  this 
mortal  plane — and  now  they  are  ready  to  pass  into 
the  Second  Zone,  leaving  behind  the  dark-stained 
vibrations  or  substance  of  their  past  acts  and 
deeds — ready  to  create  a  new  and  brighter  gar- 
ment to  function  through  as  they  proceed  on  their 
journey  of  progression  through  the  Soul  World. 

When  the  light  ahead  first  glimmers  in  their 
conscousness,  these  Beings  cry  out  for  joy  and 

49 


oftimes  sing  familiar  hymns  that  mother  used  to 
sing  in  their  childhood.  The  strong  mother  love 
bursts  forth  and  she  is  the  One — after  these 
Beings  have  become  awakened — whom  they  usu- 
ally think  of  first. 

Their  faith  in  the  Beneficent  Angel,  who  so  ten- 
derly and  kindly  led  the  way,  showering  their 
Being  with  Divine  Love,  is  like  that  of  a  child  for 
a  parent — they  cling  to  his  very  garment  and  long 
to  be  in  his  presence — they  long  for  His  Love  and 
are  most  obedient  to  all  His  Teachings.  They  bow 
with  great  Reverence  in  the  Spirit  of  Love  to 
these  wonderful  Masters  of  Wisdom  who  are  the 
Teachers  in  these  Zones — and  these  are  the 
Angels  who  guided  these  Souls  to  this  Expression 
of  Life  and  watched  over  them  as  they  were  the 
Actors  in  the  Great  Drama  of  this  physical  life 
and  now  they  are  carefully  guiding  the  way  back 
to  the  Angelic  State. 

During  this  terrible  Crisis,  through  which  this 
world  has  just  passed,  only  a  few  out  of  the  Mil- 
lions of  Souls  cast  into  the  World  of  Soul,  were 
taken  to  this  Dark  Zone. 

Beneficent  Angel,  who  came  from  afar 

To  shed  thy  rays  which  transmute  the  scar 

That  the  weary  traveler  may  see  the  Light 
That  will  quicken  his  Soul  into  delight 
As  he  beholds  the  glorious,  radiant  sky 

Which  reveals  a  Power  of  greater  Might 


50 


Than  all  that  earth  with  goods  could  bestow 
Upon  any  mortal  who  dwells  here  below. 

Beneficent  Angel,  to  thee  we  bow 
In  Reverence  with  Love  and  Sacred  vow 
That  ne'er  again  my  footsteps  shall  trod 
The  Lower  rungs  of  earth's  great  plot 
That  binds  the  Soul  in  fetters  and  chains 
And  leaves  the  marks  of  stain  and  pain 
That  thou  no  longer  shall  try  in  vain 
To  lift  my  Soul  through  clouds  and  stain. 

Beneficent  Angel  who  came  from  afar 
To  lead  the  way  that  I  might  follow 
to  the  path  that  points  to  yonder  star 
Where  dwell  the  Angels  and  hosts  sublime 
In  joy  and  peace  and  Love  Divine ; 
To  thee  I  bow  for  thy  Kindly  patience, 
For  thy  Knowledge  and  Wisdom  imparted 
To  my  Soul  in  its  hours  of  darkness. 


51 


SECOND  ZONE 
The  Domestic  belt  in  the  Ethereal  World 

One  Hundred  and  Fifty  Thousand  Miles  from  this 
Earth  Realm. 

Thou  Holy,  Holy  God — Thou  who  art  the  Divine 
Essence  in  All  there  is — awaken  us  out  of  our 
dreams  and  delusions — dogmas  and  beliefs  that 
obstruct  our  vision  from  Thee — and  help  us  to 
weave  into  the  warp  and  woof  of  our  lives,  the 
golden  threads  of  love  for  all  humanity  that  we 
may  be  lifted  out  of  the  fogs  of  materiality  into 
Spiritual  Light  and  Truth,  into  a  realization  of 
Thy  Wisdom  and  behold  Thy  Divine  Plan  ex- 
pressed throughout  the  Universe. 

Perhaps  the  most  astonishing  truth  that  con- 
fronts the  Soul  after  leaving  the  physical  body,  is 
the  fact  that  he  finds  himself  in  a  Natural  World, 
and  as  he  progresses  in  his  present  environments 


52 


he  learns  that  this  Natural  World  leads  to  God's 
Heavenly  Kingdoms  and  then  to  His  Celestial  and 
Divine  Kingdoms  and  that  God's  Heavenly  King- 
doms and  His  Celestial  Kingdoms  are  All  Natural 
regardless  of  their  Heavenly  Holy  Divine  States. 

The  many  advantages  and  opportunities  found 
in  this  World  of  Soul  over  those  which  confronted 
us  in  the  physical  world  is  another  most  astound- 
ing revelation.  Here  we  find  ourselves  free  from 
all  limitations  of  Man  made  Laws  and  Man's  Con- 
ceptions of  God's  Laws.  Those  Conceptions  of  the 
various  Individualized  and  Centralized  organiza- 
tions which  have  been  forced  upon  man  through- 
out the  ages,  with  all  their  Errors  and  Delusions. 

Being  free  from  the  cumbersome  physical  body 
through  which  we  functioned  our  vision  is  some- 
what clearer  and  broader — all  things  present 
themselves  in  their  various  aspects — as  we  now 
behold  things  in  a  different  Light.  In  our  present 
state,  we  realize  the  difference  between  Beliefs 
and  Facts — between  Man's  conception  of  God's 
plan  and  God's  Will  and  the  Reality  as  it  now  im- 
pinges itself  upon  our  Consciousness. 

With  these  facts  before  us,  the  awakened  Soul 
naturally  questions  why  all  these  various  struc- 
tures for  worship  which  grace  the  different  por- 
tions of  this  Zone,  as  we  wander  through  the 
various  cities  and  villages  of  this  country,  our 
attention  is  naturally  attracted  to  these  churches, 
many  of  them  appearing  familiar.  In  fact  there 
is  not  a  religious  organization  that  will  not  find 

53 


their  thoughts  manifested  here  in  this  Zone.  In 
the  world  of  Soul,  our  thoughts  become  objectified 
or  manifest.  Through  our  thinking  we  are  daily 
creating  the  substance  out  of  which  is  fashioned 
our  home,  our  conditions,  our  environments  in  the 
world  of  Soul  as  well  as  in  this  Material  World. 

Another  one  of  the  most  astounding  facts  that 
confronts  us  when  we  have  entered  the  world  of 
Soul  is  that  the  things  which  seemed  so  vital  and 
important  to  us  on  this  earth  are  of  no  conse- 
quence whatever  in  the  Ethereal  World  and  that 
the  most  important  and  most  essential  facts  have 
been  entirely  neglected — all  due  to  our  training 
and  system  of  education. 

As  our  journey  through  this  earth  in  the  phys- 
ical body  is  of  such  a  short  duration  and  the  life 
in  the  Ethereal  World  exceeds  it  by  many  years 
it  is  very  important  that  we  should  be  educated 
in  our  childhood  about  our  Being  and  the  purpose 
of  this  expression  of  life.  It  is  very  essential  that 
we  are  taught  that  there  is  a  Soul  life  as  well  as  a 
physical  expression  of  life.  As  God  in  his  Divine 
Wisdom  prepared  such  a  beautiful  suitable  world 
for  the  physical  expression  of  life,  He  could  not 
make  a  mistake  and  forget  to  prepare  a  suitable 
world  for  the  habitation  of  the  Man's  finer  body ; 
a  world  that  so  far  excells  this  physical  world  that 
no  finite  Mind  could  adequately  reveal  its  Sublime 
Glorious  Beauty.  It  is  very  essential  that  we  know 
that  all  that  is — was  and  ever  will  be  has  come 


54 


from  the  One  Infinite  Source — the  Fountain  of  All 
Life— All  Light— All  Wisdom— All  Love. 

One  of  the  most  essential  branches  of  knowl- 
edge concerning  our  Being  is  the  Law  of  Vibra- 
tion. Children  should  be  given  colored  balls  rep- 
resenting the  colors  of  the  Solar  beam  as  reflected 
in  the  prism  and  taught  their  color — rate  of  vibra- 
tion and  chemical  value.  Mortals  should  learn  to 
realize  and  recognize  the  fact  that  there  are  vibra- 
tions above  and  below  the  range  or  octave  of 
vibration  to  which  \ve  are  attuned  and  to  which 
our  physical  senses  respond  on  this  material 
realm.  We  should  know  that  there  are  many 
octaves  below  and  above  the  limitations  of  the 
physical  senses  and  that  we  can  so  cleanse,  so 
refine  and  purify  ourselves  that  we  may  be  recep- 
tive to  the  higher  Vibrations.  We  should  be 
taught  another  essential  fact — that  we  have  Soul 
senses  as  well  as  physical  senses  and  that  the  same 
natural  law  of  evolution  which  evolved  our  five 
senses  will  evolve  the  sixth  and  seventh  senses 
which  enables  us  to  see  beyond  the  limitations  of 
our  present  physical  senses  and  perceive  that 
which  exists  behind  the  screen — that  which  is 
Facts — that  which  is  Real — that  which  is  Natural 
— because  the  sixth  and  seventh  senses  respond  to 
higher  rates  of  vibrations. 

Many  today  on  the  earth  are  cultivating  a  posi- 
tive attitude  of  Mind,  thinking  that  positivity,  as 
they  call  it,  shuts  out  all  Evil  Influences.  This 
Erroneous  Idea  is  based  on  a  misconception  of 


55 


God's  Law.  All  so-called  Evil  is  within  our  own 
Mind — if  we  Cease  to  think  Evil — Refuse  to  do 
Evil,  we  can  not  ATTRACT  the  Evil.  All  knowl- 
edge— all  Wisdom,  all  Power  in  a  finite  degree  lies 
within  the  Soul.  As  we  unfold  higher  degrees  of 
consciousness,  through  Divine  Love  for  All  hu- 
manity— Keeping  our  thoughts  pure  and  clean — 
doing  unto  others  as  we  would  have  them  do  unto 
us — there  can  be  no  Evil  come  near  you.  The 
light  of  your  Soul  will  radiate  such  a  Tremendous 
Power  that  it  will  transmute  and  Uplift  all  Evil 
(which  is  ignorance  and  darkness)  into  that  which 
is  Good.  Let  us  remember  the  Law  of  attraction 
and  repulsion  plays  its  part  throughout  the  Uni- 
verse and  the  Power  of  attraction  lies  within  your 
own  Soul  and  you  set  God's  Laws  in  Motion 
through  your  Thinking.  As  you  are  the  Dynamo 
in  which  are  generated  the  thoughts  that  you 
send  forth  on  the  Ether  waves — attracting  like 
quality — you  are  also  the  Magnet  which  attracts 
them  back — and  they  return  freighted  with  like 
quality — attracting  to  you  Individuals  and  condi- 
tions from  both  worlds,  the  World  of  Soul  and 
those  in  the  Physical  body. 

Positivity  shuts  out  the  light  of  the  Soul  and 
the  Light  that  radiates  from  that  Divine  Infinite 
Center  we  call  God.  Positivity  in  the  Material 
Realm  means  Strength — Power — and  those  who 
practice  being  positive  create  vibrations  and 
attract  the  Lower  vibrations  that  tend  towards 
Brutality — Obstinacy — Determination  and  Ego- 


56 


tism,  which  enters  into  the  warp  and  woof  of  your 
life  and  forms  a  garment  of  this  Substance  which 
is  so  dense  that  it  imprisons  the  Light  of  the  Soul 
arid  shuts  out  all  Light  that  flows  from  God's 
Divine  and  Celestial  Kingdoms,  which  is  heavily 
laden  with  Knowledge  and  Wisdom.  As  the  Soul 
evolves  it  becomes  more  porous  and  is  like  a  sponge 
that  drinks  in  the  water.  The  Soul  absorbs  the 
Divine  Light  which  rechemicalizes  the  physical 
organism,  making  it  a  fit  temple  for  higher  vibra- 
tions— higher  degrees  of  consciousness — therefore 
practice  receptivity  instead  of  positivity. 

In  this  Zone  we  find  the  manifestations  of  All 
Nature  Kissed  by  the  rays  of  the  same  Sun  whose 
glowing  brilliant  light  has  been  felt  and  witnessed 
throughout  our  journey  on  the  Earth;  except  that 
at  no  time  do  we  receive  the  full  light  of  our  day 
as  on  the  Earth  realm.  Here  it  is  always  twilight 
and  this  is  indicative  of  the  light  of  the  Soul  of 
the  Individuals  who  gravitate  to  this  Zone. 

The  Souls  who  enter  here  may  be  designated  in 
Seven  distinct  classes  or  gradations  of  Soul  un- 
foldment — or  Seven  States  of  Mind  and  Condi- 
tions. 

Among  a  certain  class,  we  find  those  who  believe 
that  when  they  make  the  change  called  death — 
they  will  go  to  Heaven  and  find  God.  They  have 
no  conception  of  God's  Laws  or  the  purpose  of 
life.  They  have  never  known  anything  of  the  con- 
struction of  the  Universe.  They  have  no  concep- 
tion of  other  worlds  than  our  Earth  or  our  Solar 


57 


System  or  other  Systems — and  these  are  very 
much  disappointed  in  not  finding  the  Golden 
Streets  and  God  sitting  on  a  throne  to  embrace 
them  for  their  diligence  in  obeying  the  rules  of  the 
church.  Some  of  these  think  they  have  had  vis- 
ions of  God  and  Heaven,  not  realizing  they  have 
created  these  visions  in  their  own  Minds.  These 
are  individuals  who  cling  so  tenaciously  to  their 
beliefs  and  follow  the  same  routine,  never  for  a 
moment  questioning  the  whys  and  wherefores  of 
that  which  confronts  them.  Their  greatest  obsta- 
cle is  obstinancy  caused  by  their  undeveloped 
Mind.  Their  Mind  has  been  trained  in  only  one 
channel  to  follow  the  dictations  of  certain  relig- 
ious organizations.  Many  of  these  remain  here  tor 
years  and  years.  When  they  do  not  find  God,  they 
think  they  are  in  waiting  for  Gabriel  to  blow  his 
trumpet — then  God  will  appear — and  others  think 
they  are  in  purgatory  and  must  pray  themselves 
out  of  this  world  and  be  more  diligent  in  their 
worship  by  attending  their  favorite  church  more 
diligently.  These  people  do  not  wish  to  be  dis- 
turbed with  any  other  ideas — in  fact  would  not 
listen  to  anything  else,  so  many  of  them  remain 
for  years  and  years  until  they  are  ready  to  listen 
and  desire  to  know — then  they  are  taught  God's 
Laws. 

Among  another  class  of  dwellers  in  this  Zone 
are  fonud  many  who  have  been  considered  Great 
characters.  They  were  very  popular,  were  con- 
sidered very  progressive  on  this  Earth  realm. 


58 


Many  of  them  had  gained  for  themselves  Name 
and  Fame  and  High  positions  in  the  eyes  of  the 
Earth  world.  Some  in  the  social  circles,  some  in 
Political  circles,  others  in  Religious  organizations. 
Promulgators  of  New  religious  ideas,  many  who 
have  been  Leaders  in  Religion  and  Scientific  lines, 
so  called  Scientists,  Musicians  and  Artists,  who 
were  so  beloved  and  esteemed  on  the  Earth,  but, 
during  all  their  popularity  and  Glory  on  this  Mor- 
tal Realm,  did  not  kindle  the  Light  of  their  Soul 
— and  they  did  not  realize  that  the  Light  of  the 
Mind  or  Intellect  is  only  a  reflected  light.  Much 
of  our  Mental  development  is  very  superficial  and 
entwined  with  selfishness  and  Egotism.  When 
these  Souls  enter  here  and  see  themselves  as  they 
really  are — not  as  they  appeared  and  yet  appear 
in  the  eyes  of  the  world,  but  see  themselves  in 
garments  which  their  delusions  and  Egotistical 
ideas  have  woven  around  them,  sad  indeed  is  the 
intense  disappointment  of  these  individuals.  With 
the  foregoing  before  us  we  must  admit  that  it  is 
not  Who  you  are  or  who  you  have  been  that 
counts  in  God's  Kingdom,  but  what  you  have 
Thought  and  Said  and  Done — that  is  you — and 
That  is  What  Counts — It  is  that  which  you  must 
face  when  you  leave  the  physical  body  to  function 
in  the  Ethereal  World— the  World  of  the  Soul. 

Among  another  class  we  find  those  who  have 
never  given  a  thought  to  the  purpose  of  their  ex- 
istence in  this  material  world.  They  are  simply 
existing  from  day  to  day,  gratifying  their  phys- 


59 


ical  sensations  and  physical  desires  trying  to  ful- 
fill the  duties  of  their  daily  requirements  with  no 
thought  whatever  of  a  life  beyond  this  expression. 
The  Light  of  their  Soul  is  so  dormant  that  they 
are  not  conscious  of  anything  beyond  the  petty 
things  of  every-day  occurances,  which  do  not  tend 
towards  the  edvelopment  tff  the  Mind  or  the  Evo- 
lution of  the  Divine  attributes  of  the  Soul.  They 
have  feasted  at  the  fountain  of  selfishness — crit- 
icism— bigotry  and  lust  and  commercialism  and 
find  themselves  enmeshed  in  a  garment  that  is  not 
attractive  in  the  world  of  Soul.  Such  individuals 
are  like  a  fish  out  of  water.  They  find  it  very 
difficult  to  become  adjusted  in  their  New  environ- 
ments and  new  conditions. 

Among  another  class  who  Egotistically  Believe 
in  One  World  at  a  time.  Why  bother,  why  make 
any  effort  to  know  why  we  are  functioning  in  this 
material  world?  We  know  we  are  and  that  is 
enough — so  they  thought.  Let  us  concentrate  for 
success  and  prosperity  and  surround  ourselves 
with  all  of  this  World's  goods,  have  plenty  of  all 
we  want  and  be  happy  in  the  enjoyment  of  that 
which  we  have  accomplished  while  we  are  here. 
If  I  can  create  for  myself  happiness  and  success 
on  this  earth,  in  this  physical  form,  why  be  con- 
cerned about  the  Soul  and  the  World  in  which  we 
must  function  after  we  leave  this  physical  body? 
So  long  as  I  can  satisfy  the  desires  of  my  Mind 
right  now?  Such  have  not  realized  that  all  this 
seeking  for  Material  possession  is  contrary  to  tile 


60 


teachings  of  Christ,  the  Great  Master,  who  said, 
"Seek  ye  first  the  Kingdom  of  Heaven,  and  then 
all  else  will  be  added.''  So  in  their  efforts  for  suc- 
cess and  prosperity  on  this  material  plane,  the 
Soul  was  becoming  enmeshed  with  all  these  mate- 
rial vibrations  of  greed,  selfishness,  and  while 
seeking  for  all  these  material  possessions,  the  light 
of  the  Soul  remained  dormant  and  when  these  in- 
dividuals come  face  to  face  with  their  delusions 
and  behold  the  garment  of  their  Soul,  those  who 
hover  near  look  upon  them  with  great  sympathy 
and  pity. 

Among  another  class  may  be  found  those  who 
lived  in  luxury  here  on  this  Earth,  who  always 
had  all  they  desired  of  this  world's  goods,  who  had 
every  advantage  that  this  material  earth  could 
offer — money,  lands,  raiment,  jewelry  and  all 
commodities  and  luxuries,  everything  that  is  con- 
sidered desirable  in  the  physical  world.  Among 
these  are  Rulers,  Merchants,  Financiers,  retired 
Business  men  and  women  who  have  enjoyed  the 
wealth  of  great  estates,  but  with  all  their  advan- 
tages, the  most  important  and  the  most  esesntial 
of  all  in  this  World  was  neglected — The  Soul — 
The  Sacred  Soul.  Their  Minds  were  so  attracted 
to  Material  possessions  that  they  felt  that  these 
were  of  most  importance.  Pitiful  is  the  sight  to 
behold  when  these  Souls  enter  here  and  find  them- 
selves surrounded  by  barren  conditions  suited  to 
the  condition  of  the  Soul. 

Among  another  class  of  dwellers  in  this  Zone, 

61 


are  found  those  who  are  of  a  mechanical  and  in- 
ventive turn  of  Mind  and  who  did  not  complete 
their  work  or  fulfill  their  desires  along  such  lines. 
These  are  found  here  in  great  numbers  working 
out  various  porblems  along  mechanical  and  elec- 
trical devices.  Working  out  problems  for  aero- 
planes— wireless,  in  fact  many  implements,  tools, 
devices  of  various  kinds  are  being  considered  and 
worked  out  here  for  the  benefit  of  Man,  who  is 
still  functioning  on  the  physical  realm  of  life  as 
these  will  become  a  great  necessity  with  the  future 
generations,  when  the  Minds  will  have  turned  into 
higher  channels — greater  ideals — then  machin- 
ery will  do  most  of  the  labor  that  man  is  doing 
now,  while  man  will  devote  certain  portions  of 
each  day  to  developing  the  Mind  and  unfolding 
the  Divine  attributes  of  the  Soul. 

All  who  pass  out  in  accidents — quakes — fires — 
water — wars — many  whose  physical  existence  has 
been  cut  off  ere  the  time  for  their  transition,  pass 
to  this  Zone  and  here  they  find  opportunities  and 
advantages  that  will  enable  them  to  continue  life, 
beginning  where  they  left  off  on  the  Earth.  Here 
they  are  placed  according  to  their  condition  and 
ability  after  they  have  become  adjusted  to  their 
new  environments  and  new  conditions.  Many  of 
these  Souls  find  it  difficult  to  overcome  the  desires 
created  during  their  earth  life  and  the  sudden 
separation  from  those  who  were  so  dear  to  them 
while  others  adjust  themselves  very  rapidly  and 
soon  grasp  the  opportunity  of  progressing  into 

62 


higher  conditions  and  find  much  satisfaction  and 
gratification  in  their  new  activities.  The  major- 
ity of  soldiers  and  individuals  who  were  forced  out 
of  their  physical  bodies  during  this  terrible  crisis 
through  which  the  world  has  passed  have  been 
placed  in  the  Second  Zone.  Some  few  were  Eligi- 
ble for  the  Third  Zone.  Those  whose  Souls  were 
shattered  into  a  mass  of  pulp  were  carefully  and 
tenderly  gathered  by  Beneficent  Angels  and  placed 
here  in  this  Zone,  where  they  will  sleep  until  the 
Soul  will  recuperate  its  Powers  into  activity — 
then  when  they  awaken,  they  will  be  placed  and 
continue  their  activity  in  their  new  environments. 
They  will  not  be  conscious  of  what  has  happened 
until  they  have  fully  recuperated.  Some  will  be 
able  to  recall  the  incident  on  awakening,  others 
may  not  for  years — until  they  enter  into  the 
Vibration  that  will  arouse  the  fact  in  their  Con- 
sciousness. 

Parents  and  loved  ones  should  rejoice  in  the  fact 
that  there  is  No  Death  and  that  their  boys  will 
continue  life  in  this  Zone  and  prepare  themselves 
to  progress  to  higher  and  higher  states  of  activ- 
ity which  will  enable  them  to  send  forth  Vibra- 
tions that  will  be  helpful  to  those  who  are  left 
here  in  the  physical  realm.  Here  they  will  be 
classified  according  to  their  SouPs  growth,  as 
many  of  these  lads  are  very  wide  awake  and  had 
not  yet  enmeshed  themselves  in  dense  cloudy 
vibrations  of  the  earth  realm,  their  thoughts  and 
activity,  having  been  directed  towards  building  a 


63 


foundation  for  their  earthly  activities — hence 
such  will  progress  very  rapidly  into  the  Third 
Zone,  where  they  will  start  their  March  of  Soul 
progression  and  waiting  for  the  time  when  those 
who  are  so  dear  to  them  on  the  earth  realm  will 
make  the  transition  called  death  and  will  join  them 
in  the  Soul  world.  The  ties  of  Love  can  never  be 
severed,  but  continue  through  Eternity.  It  is 
Divine  Love  that  bridges  the  chasm  between  the 
two  worlds.  It  is  Divine  Love  that  causes  the 
thoughts  of  the  parents  and  loved  ones  to  reach 
out  towards  those  who  have  gone  on  ahead  to 
journey  in  the  Ethereal  World,  and  it  is  Divine 
Love  that  causes  those  in  the  Ethereal  World  fo 
reach  back  to  those  still  functioning  in  their 
physical  body.  Then  how  could  there  be  anything 
but  interaction  between  the  two  worlds?  Only 
those  who  have  not  Real  Love  in  their  hearts  could 
doubt  this  truth.  There  are  various  kinds  of  love 
manifested  on  the  Earth  realm,  but  Divine  Love, 
which  is  the  very  Essence  of  the  Soul — that  is 
the  Power  of  Attraction — that  is  the  cord  that 
binds  which  no  man  can  sever — no  man  can  de- 
stroy— and  all  our  Theories,  Cults,  beliefs  and 
Teachings  can  never  wipe  out  the  Fact  of  the  In- 
teraction of  the  Two  Worlds  and  the  Benefits  de- 
rived from  the  Interaction  through  the  Sacred 
Holy  Souls  who  descend  from  God's  Divine  King- 
dom to  this  Earth  realm,  and  when  we  war  against 
these  facts  we  war  against  God  and  ourselves. 
Now  let  us  go  back  to  the  churches,  all  of  which 

64 


means  so  much  to  the  different  classes  of  dwellers 
here  in  this  Zone.  Here  the  churches  are  serving 
a  purpose  just  as  they  did  and  do  on  the  Earth. 
Many  of  these  theories  and  beliefs  have  served  as 
a  stepping  stone  towards  Realities.  Through  the 
various  experiences  encountered  in  such  environ- 
ments, the  pure,  clean  Soul  became  awakened — 
absorbing  from  its  environments  that  which  was 
necessary  for  its  growth.  When  the  Soul  becomes 
sufficiently  awakened  it  uses  its  own  faculties  and 
reasons  from  cause  to  effect.  Such  a  Soul  can  no 
longer  be  content  with  theories  and  beliefs  because 
it  gets  glimpses  of  that  which  is  beyond  this  realm 
so  naturally  it  drifts  into  higher  channels.  While 
the  soul  that  has  not  yet  built  a  foundation  of  its 
own  drifts  with  the  tide  and  has  found  the  church 
a  great  pillar  to  lean  upon  and  follows  the  dicta- 
tions of  Man's  conception  of  God's  Laws  without 
any  hesitancy  because  they  are  not  doing  their 
own  thinking  and  consequently  have  not  devel- 
oped their  own  faculties  and  hence  are  not  capable 
of  judging  between  that  which  Is  a  Reality  and 
that  which  Seems  a  Reality. 

There  are  many  Souls  who  were  better  for  hav- 
ing had  a  pure  ideal  held  constantly  before  their 
Minds  such  as  the  churches  have  offered  them — 
even  though  that  Ideal  was  a  delusion.  They  were 
by  far  better  than  the  Individual  whose  Ideal  was 
or  is  no  higher  than  to  wholly  gratify  their  brutal 
physical  inclinations  and  physical  desires.  Since 
the  pure  ideal  will  lead  to  the  Soul's  awakening  into 


65 


the  Realities — while  the  physical  animal  tenden- 
cies will  lead  to  degradation  and  remorse.  No  one 
can  indulge  in  the  doctrinal  teachings  of  the 
churches  with  a  pure  mind  and  pure  intentions 
and  not  be  benefited  and  grow  nearer  and  nearer 
to  the  Truth.  All  things  serve  a  purpose  on  the 
earth  and  when  we  outgrow  that  purpose,  we  drift 
into  the  next  step.  It  is  a  Natural  Law  displayed 
throughout  the  Universe  in  every  plane  and  every 
Kingdom  that  when  anything  has  served  its  pur- 
pose it  passes  away  to  make  room  for  something 
higher — as  forms,  conditions  and  circumstances 
and  ideas — when  they  have  served  their  purpose 
they  pass  away  and  new  conditions,  new  forms, 
new  ideas,  take  their  place.  The  old  Law  demand- 
ing an  eye  for  an  eye,  a  tooth  for  a  tooth  had  to 
pass  away  and  make  room  for  something  higher; 
something  better,  which  would  arouse  the  spirit- 
ual Nature  in  Man — the  Christ  principle  which 
all  possess,  but  with  so  many  is  yet  dormant.  It 
was  that  Divine  Illumined  Soul,  Jesus  of  Nazareth 
who  revealed  to  us  the  Law  in  His  Sermon  on  the 
Mount ;  to  do  good  for  Evil — to  Love  your  Enemies 
and  Help  those  who  despise  you  and  Pray  for 
those  who  misuse  you  and  Do  unto  Others  as  You 
would  have  them  Do  unto  You — and  that  we  must 
Reap  what  we  Sow.  It  was  He  who  told  us  of  the 
Many  Mansions  in  His  Father's  House  and  of  the 
Eternal  City  not  made  with  hands.  It  was  He 
who  saw  that  every  Soul  is  Divine  and  Sacred 
regardless  of  color  and  race — regardless  of  our 

66 


mistakes.  He  knew  the  Element  of  Divine  Love 
is  Eternal  and  is  the  Divine  Essence  of  All  life 
found  in  every  man. 

When  the  present  teachings  of  the  churches 
have  served  their  purpose,  man  will  demand  some- 
thing higher,  more  truth  and  less  dogma — more 
truth  and  less  beliefs — more  truth  and  spiritual- 
ity and  less  materiality  until  by  and  by  man  will 
have  awakened  and  the  Light  of  the  Soul  will  lead 
man  to  higher  ideals  and  reveal  God's  law  instead 
of  following  Man's  conception  of  God's  Law.  There 
are  many  on  the  earth  to-day  who  are  following 
the  dictations  of  their  own  Soul,  having  evolved 
higher  degrees  of  consciousness  and  the  Light  of 
their  own  Soul  is  pointing  the  way.  that  leads  to 
God's  Divine  Kingdoms  and  those  who  are  still  in 
the  churches  will  some  time  outgrow  their  present 
dictum  and  will  demand  the  Truth  about  God's 
Laws  which  are  manifested  throughout  the 
Universe. 

So  in  this  Second  Zone  we  find  the  churches  and 
various  religious  organizations  are  the  manifesta- 
tions of  the  substance  sent  forth  through  the 
thoughts  of  humanity,  who,  functioning  in  a  phys- 
ical body  on  the  earth,  and  those  who  gravitate 
here  ere  they  have  outgrown  these  vibrations  can 
continue  in  the  same  old  way  until  they  are  ready 
and  desire  to  know.  You  have  eternity  before  you 
and  when  your  Soul  becomes  quickened  you  will 
desire  facts  and  will  shift  into  other  channels. 
This  is  the  only  Zone  in  the  Ethereal  World  in 


67 


which  are  found  churches  and  religious  organiza- 
tions. In  all  the  higher  Zones  are  Temples  of 
Learning  and  Temples  of  Worship,  but  all  wor- 
ship, according  to  God's  Law  as  the  Light  of  the 
Soul  has  revealed  and  there  is  no  dictum  to  follow 
which  has  been  created  through  Man's  undevel- 
oped state  of  mind — through  Man's  misconception 
of  God's  Will. 

In  this  Zone  the  dwellers  clothe  themselves  in 
similar  attire  to  that  which  we  find  here  on  the 
earth — except  those  who  have  grown  out  of  be- 
liefs and  the  dictations  of  the  church.  These  are 
happy  and  proud  to  don  a  white  robe  which  the 
teachers  have  woven  for  them.  After  they  pass 
into  this  state  of  growth  they  are  ready  to  pass 
into  the  Third  Zone. 

As  the  Soul  awakens  out  of  beliefs,  many  prob- 
lems and  questions  arise  in  his  mind  which  the 
churches  no  longer  can  satisfactorily  answer  such 
Souls  are  admitted  into  the  Temple  of  Worship, 
where  the  Masters  teach  the  inquiring  Minds. 
This  Temple  is  a  beautiful  white  Structure  in  the 
Central  portion  of  this  Zone,  situated  on  a  high 
elevation  with  its  attractive  surroundings  of  flow- 
ers, vines,  trellises,  arches  covered  with  trailing 
vines  and  flowers.  From  this  elevation  the  Souls 
who  ascend  to  this  Temple  have  a  most  wonderful 
view  of  every  part  of  this  Zone.  In  its  various 
apartments  are  teachers  who  reveal  the  existence 
of  the  Third  Zone  and  its  requirements  and  con- 
ditions and  here  they  prepare  themselves  for 


Third  Zone.  Many  of  the  brilliant  Minds,  after 
their  Soul  became  awakened,  are  ready  to  continue 
their  studies  along  various  lines  and  here  in  the 
different  apartments  they  find  the  Teachers  who 
assist  them  and  start  them  in  the  right  path  for 
the  Journey  that  lies  before  them. 

As  you  ramble  through  this  Zone  you  will  find 
there  is  no  public  library,  but  there  are  a  few  read- 
ing rooms.  You  will  note  that  the  activity 
throughout  this  Zone  is  very  similar  to  that  on 
our  earth  realm.  You  will  see  these  dwellers 
transact  business  in  a  modified  form — you  will 
note  they  have  many  domestic  duties  very  similar 
to  these  here.  You  will  find  many  beautiful 
homes  and  very  nicely  furnished — beautiful  gar- 
dens and  lawns.  Many  of  the  houses  are  covered 
with  vines  surrounded  with  many  flowers  and 
perrenials  in  the  main  parts  of  the  cities.  Many 
fountains  with  their  beautiful  sprays  are  seen  in 
these  cities  in  their  parks  and  in  their  lawns — 
Benches  are  found  here  and  there  where  the  trav- 
eler may  recline  and  watch  the  sprays  of  glitter- 
ing waters  rise  to  great  heights  while  near  by  he 
will  note  masterpieces  of  living  statuary  of  noted 
personages. 

As  you  wander  through  this  Zone,  you  are 
attracted  to  their  beautiful  parks  with  their  sur- 
roundings where  the  dwellers  go  to  rest  and  meet 
their  friends.  On  their  lakes  are  seen  dwellers 
enjoying  the  water  rowing  along  in  their  boats — 
others  are  drifting,  while  the  pedestrians  are 

69 


reclining  on  the  benches  under  some  magnificent 
tree  in  the  park  near  by,  listening  to  the  songs 
and  music  so  popular  and  well  known  on  this  earth 
realm.  In  the  parks  more  centrally  situated  are 
found  flowers,  perrenials,  vines  covering  many 
cozy  nooks  where  lovers  usually  meet.  Many 
fountains  and  small  bodies  of  water  with  their 
gold  fish  and  other  varieties.  Here  you  can 
listen  to  the  cooing  of  the  birds  and  watch  the 
squirrels  and  rabbits  all  so  very  beautiful  in  this 
World  of  Soul. 

Throughout  this  Zone  you  will  find  deers,  wolves, 
lions,  dogs,  cats  and  many  other  animals  which 
are  pets  in  the  Soul  World.  As  you  wander 
through  this  Zone  with  its  cities,  its  villages,  its 
lakes  and  valleys,  its  ravines  and  streams,  its 
meadows  and  mountains,  it  seems  like  a  world  of 
its  own.  Many  who  gravitate  here  would  not 
know  they  had  made  the  change  called  death  if 
their  own  conditions  and  environments  corre- 
sponded to  those  that  surrounded  them  on  the 
earth  realm — as  here  the  scenery,  the  trees,  and 
flowers  and  the  general  outlook  of  this  country  is 
like  that  found  in  nearly  every  part  of  our  earth 
realm. 

Many  of  these  Souls  who  lived  in  luxury  and 
perfect  comfort  on  the  earth  sphere  found  them- 
selves clothed  in  common  raiment  and  in  place 
of  a  palacious  elegantly  furnished  home,  they  find 
themselves  in  a  barren  little  humble  cottage  in 
some  obscure  part  of  the  city  or  village.  While 


70 


others  who  toiled  faithfully  and  so  hard,  who 
had  many  obstacles  to  overcome,  to  attain  a  mere 
existence  found  themselves  in  a  beautiful  com- 
fortable home  with  attractive  surroundings — gar- 
den of  flowers  and  fruit  trees,  grapes,  apples, 
berries  and  others.  All  of  these  being  the  fru- 
ition of  the  substance  sent  forth  through  their 
kindly  acts  and  deeds  which  have  brought  joy 
to  their  Soul. 

Many  who  were  considered  very  ordinary  and 
commonplace  on  this  earth  realm,  live  in  attrac- 
tive houses  with  their  gardens  of  flowers — stat- 
uary on  their  lawns  and  the  enjoyable  sprays  of 
fountains. 

Here  you  will  find  hedges  and  gardens  of  flowers 
growing  to  great  heights  and  more  beautifully 
developed  than  the  same  species  on  the  earth. 
Among  these  you  will  find  phlox,  ox-eyed  daisies, 
fox-glove,  asters,  snap  dragon,  blue  bells,  thistle, 
golden  rod,  corn  flowers,  geraniums,  tiger  lilies, 
blue  flag,  sylvium,  columbine,  oleanders,  hydrang- 
eas, buttercups,  button  bush,  marigold,  field  pop- 
pies, poinsettas,  roses,  lantana  and  other  varieties. 

Most  of  the  homes  are  painted  in  brown,  some 
few  are  white.  Some  portions  of  this  Zone  has 
the  appearance  of  a  beautiful  cultivated  country, 
with  attractive  buildings,  beautiful  gardens  with 
their  artistic  settings,  benches  under  the  spread- 
ing branches  of  trees  where  the  traveler  can  rest 
and  read  a  book  or  gaze  into  the  distant  scenery 
and  behold  the  mountains  and  unique  bridges  ac- 


71 


ross  streams  or  ravines,  watching  the  pedestrians 
going  to  and  fro. 

While  in  other  portions  of  this  country  you  may 
behold  fields  of  grain  and  trees  laden  with  fruit, 
and  here  you  will  find  a  tree  called  the  BREAD 
TREE  bearing  a  fruit  called  Bread  Fruit  which  the 
dwellers  use. 

As  we  wander  in  other  portions,  we  find  barren 
deserts  and  scanty  little  huts  all  significant  of 
the  Selfish,  clannish,  domineering,  irritable  dis- 
positions and  characteristics  of  the  dwellers  who 
now  occupy  these  homes  with  their  surroundings. 
So  as  we  measure  unto  others  so  it  is  meted  out 
to  ourselves.  Many  who  have  given  to  charities 
only  when  they  would  receive  public  praise  and 
advertisement  for  themselves,  never  having  shar- 
ity  or  love  in  their  heart  for  the  needy  unfortun- 
ate Souls  while  in  the  physical  body;  such  are 
found  here  in  surroundings  that  are  pitiful — and 
when  they  meet  those  whom  they  have  known  in 
the  physical  form  upon  whom  they  have  looked 
with  a  frown  of  scorn  and  no  love  in  their  hearts 
and  find  such  in  better  environments  than  them- 
selves, they  naturally  question — "How  is  this? 
Why  is  it?"  It  had  never  occured  to  them  that 
every  action  has  its  reaction  and  every  cause 
its  effect.  It  had  never  occured  to  tfrem  that  there 
is  a  golden  thread  that  links  all  humanity  as  God's 
children.  It  had  never  occured  to  them  that  we 
create  our  own  surroundings  and  environments 
from  which  we  can  not  hide.  They  follow  us  where 

72 


ere  we  go  in  fact  such  shaddows  are  there  to  greet 
us.  There  is  not  a  kindly  thought  or  a  kindly  act 
that  does  not  bring  its  reward.  It  is  not  only 
registered  in  our  Soul  but  also  in  our  environments. 

There  are  three  most  distinct  and  most  piti- 
ful conditions  found  in  this  Zone.  Those  who 
once  enjoyed  all  that  wealth  could  lavish  upon 
them.  Those  who  had  attained  public  praise  and 
applause  either  in  Politics,  Intellectual,  Social, 
Scientific  or  musical  circles  and  those  who  were  so 
devout  in  religious  tendencies  either  as  Founders — 
Priests — Preachers — Leaders — Teachers  and  Par- 
ishioners— all  so  disappointed  in  seeing  themselves 
as  they  really  are  instead  of  as  they  appeared  in 
the  eyes  of  this  Material  World  and  here  they 
learn  that  in  the  World  of  Soul,  we  stand  face  to 
face  with  ourselves — our  acts — our  deeds — our  de- 
gree of  unfoldment — our  state  of  progression  and 
God's  Laws. 

These  dwellers  have  their  amusements  and 
social  entertainments.  There  are  Halls  where 
prominent  speakers  appear  and  discuss  the  prob- 
lems of  our  present  day  occurrances  and  conditions 
on  this  earth  realm.  They  have  musical  entertain- 
ments where  very  prominent  musicians  take  part 
in  vocal  and  instrumental  recitals. 

They  have  many  lectures  on  religious,  social 
and  political  problems  and  on  many  scientific  sub- 
jects for  which  those  of  ability  are  chosen  to 
discuss  the  subject.  These  lectures  are  attended 
by  many. 


73 


There  are  special  occasions  when  prominent 
personages  who  now  are  dwellers  of  the  Higher 
Zones,  descend  to  lecture  on  popular  subjects  or 
their  experiences  in  their  progression  or  other 
topics  of  Universal  importance  and  such  are  at- 
tended by  the  thousands. 

These  dwellers  spend  a  great  deal  of  their  time 
in  what  they  consider  their  domestic  duties  and 
their  religious  inclinations.  They  are  taught  Mu- 
sic and  Art.  In  their  Art  Building  are  found  many 
wonderful  paintings  by  ancient  Artists  of  Madon- 
nas, Masters,  Sculptures,  Speakers,  Teachers,  Mus- 
icians, Prophets,  Sages,  Saints,  Poets,  Philoso- 
phers, Discoverers,  Mathematicians  and  Scientists. 

Among  the  many  imposing  wonderful  buildings 
in  this  Zone  is  a  Beautiful  Healing  Temple.  Here, 
many  still  functioning  in  their  physical  body  have 
been  brought  and  cured  through  these  wonderful 
vibrant  forces  centered  in  this  Temple. 

Situated  on  top  of  a  mountain  in  a  very  con- 
ducive attitude  is  found  an  Observatory  where  the 
scientists  gather  to  continue  their  observations 
and  study  with  much  greater  satisfaction  than  on 
the  earth  realm.  In  this  Building,  called  the 
"Temple  of  Science"  are  found  many  appartments 
where  each  can  continue  to  fathom  the  problems 
in  their  individual  lines — with  instruments  and 
equipments  that  far  excell  those  whlcft  were  avail- 
able on  the  Earth.  Here  they  have  every  advan- 
tage and  they  delight  in  their  new  discoveries  and 
are  anxious  to  impart  them  to  someone  still  func- 


74 


tioning  in  a  physical  body.     Chemistry  is  not 
taught  in  this  Zone,  but  the  chemists  work  out 
the  problems  in  their   line.    In   fact  this   is  a 
great  field  for  investigation  rather  than  for  pro- 
mulgation as  is  done  in  the  higher  Zones. 

Great  joy  for  him  who  sees  the  light  ere  his 
activity  is  completed  in  the  physical  body.  Such 
a  Soul  does  not  have  to  investigate,  he  knows,  and 
hence  does  not  have  to  outgrow  skepticism,  doubt, 
as  in  the  case  with  the  dwellers  in  this  Zone  whose 
light  has  not  yet  been  kindled. 

Thou  Angels  of  Light  send  forth  Thy  rays 
Unto  the  Souls  that  are  seeking  thy  ways. 
Quicken  their  spirit  with  love  Divine 
That  they  may  find  Peace  and  Rest  at  thy  Shrine. 

Beloved  children  of  Earth  and  Time 
Hasten  the  days  that  you  may  climt) 
The  ladder  of  Life  and  by  and  by 
Behold  the  Truth  and  scorn  the  lie. 


75 


THE  THIRD  ZONE  OF  THE  ETHEREAL 

WORLD 

The  Manufacturing  Belt— 200,000  Miles  from  this 
Earth  Realm. 

Thou  Infinite  Source  and  fountain  of  Life  and 
Light,  we  are  reaching  out  to  Thee  that  we  may 
see  Thy  Wisdom  in  All  there  is  and  grow  into 
a  consciousness  of  Thy  Divinity — into  a  realization 
of  Thy  Eternal  Energy  which  flows  from  the 
boundless  Universe  into  every  atom  of  our  Being 
that  it  will  regenerate  and  purify  us,  fitting  us 
for  higher  and  better  conditions  of  Life — for  great- 
er and  grander  opportunities  to  express  and  behold 
the  beauties  and  glories  of  Thy  Handiwork. 

When  you  have  become  eligible  for  the  Third 
Zone,  you  done  your  white  robe  and  pass  through 
space  that  lies  between  the  Second  and  Third 
Zones.  If  our  scientists  on  this  Earth  realm  had 
lenses  sufficiently  powerful  to  penetrate  these 
unexplored  regions  which  lie  in  the  intervening 

76 


spaces  of  the  various  planets  and  the  invisible 
belts  encircling  every  planet,  they  would  be  very 
much  surprised,  rather  dumbfounded  to  find  such 
conditions  and  the  wonderful  manifestations  of 
Nature's  forces. 

It  would  be  rather  appalling  to  come  face  to 
face  with  the  individuals  found  here  and  learn  that 
these  intelligences  once  energized  a  physical  body 
like  their  own  and  at  one  time  were  the  dwellers 
of  this  Earth  realm. 

As  you  stroll  along  the  path  of  this  beautiful 
wooded  grove  and  take  cognizance  of  the  foliage 
and  the  trees,  your  attention  is  called  to  the  fact 
that  as  you  entered  here,  the  trees  were  very  small 
quite  low — and  as  you  proceed  along  your  jour- 
ney, they  are  graduating  in  size  and  height — grow- 
ing higher  and  larger — and  by  the  time  you  get 
to  the  end  of  your  journey — they  are  very  large 
and  very  high — if  you  could  realize  that  this  is 
caused  by  the  difference  in  the  vibrations,  you 
would  not  be  surprised. 

The  substance  of  the  Second  Zone  is  much  more 
dense  and  graduates  in  vibration  as  you  ascend 
higher.  These  trees  look  like  our  maple  trees 
which  we  find  in  the  eastern  states — the  bark  and 
the  foliage — and  as  you  examine  the  leaves,  you 
find  towards  the  Second  Zone,  they  are  much 
more  opaque  and  much  more  Ethereal  at  the 
other  end  of  the  path. 

As  you  reach  the  end  of  this  journey,  you  find 
yourself  two  hundred  thousand  miles  from  the 

77 


Earth  and  here  the  teachers  meet  you  and  place 
you  Here  you  soon  become  aware  that  the  noises 
and  commotion  of  the  Earth  realm  do  not  affect 
the  dwellers  to  the  same  extent  as  they  do  in  the 
Second  Zone  and  you  find  yourself  in  a  much  better 
atmosphere  with  much  more  conducive  environ- 
ments. You  realize  that  a  weight  has  been  lifted 
for  you  have  cast  aside  another  material  garment. 
Your  vision  is  somewhat  clearer — and  if  you  are 
of  a  progressive  temperament,  you  will  soon  real- 
ize that  here  you  are  getting  the  first  breath  of  a 
spiritual  atmosphere. 

Here  is  the  beginning  of  our  Triumphant  March 
of  the  Soul  through  a  Continuous  Elevation — go- 
ing from  Zone  to  Zone  through  every  gradation  in 
every  Zone — Learning  the  Laws — gathering 
Knowledge — getting  experiences  and  assimilat- 
ing from  the  various  environments  the  knowledge 
and  Wisdom  taught  in  the  various  Temples  of 
Learning — qualifying  yourself  for  higher  and 
higher  conditions  of  life — continually  unfolding 
more  and  more  of  the  Divine  Powers  from  within — 
clarifying  and  purifying  your  Being — laying  aside 
One  material  garment  for  another — and  thus  fit- 
ting yourselves  to  be  eligible  for  God's  Heavenly 
Kingdoms,  which  are  found  on  the  Top  most  round 
of  this  Planet  and  there  prepare  yourself  to  Bask 
in  His  Eternal  Light  of  Day  where  the  Soul  of 
Man  will  Again  radiate  its  Light  in  all  its  Glory, 
singing  praises  unto  the  Lord  for  His  sublime 
Handiwork. 


78 


Now  let  us  again  come  back  in  thought  to  the 
Third  Zone,  that  we  may  become  acqainted  with 
our  environments.  About  the  first  thing  that 
impresses  itself  upon  our  consciousness  is  the 
fact  that  we  are  in  a  great  manufacturing  center — 
surrounded  by  quite  a  expanse  of  territory — being 
thirty  thousand  miles  wide,  where  manufacturing 
of  all  kinds  is  carried  on,  Such  as  wearing  apparel 
and  all  other  necessities  are  manufactured  here. 
One  of  the  most  interesting  sights  is  to  witness 
the  weaving  of  the  materials  for  our  garments 
and  not  only  this  but  here  we  are  taught  how  to 
weave  our  own  robes  which  we  wear  in  the  Tem- 
ples of  Learning — in  the  Temples  of  Worship — in 
their  festivities — and  special  gatherings. 

During  the  day,  the  commotion  of  this  planet 
sends  the  atoms  up  thousands  of  miles  into  the 
intervening  spaces  and  these  are  gathered  by 
the  Teachers  of  this  Zone  into  a  Triangle  rep- 
resenting the  Third  Zone.  Through  a  chemical 
process,  they  gather  the  chemicals  from  the  Sun, 
which  are  pink — those  from  the  Moon  are  blue — 
and  those  from  our  Earth  are  green,  together  with 
the  white  ether — and  through  a  chemical  pro- 
cess, these  are  woven  into  a  fabric  that  looks  like 
a  fine  mesh  of  cheese-cloth  in  texture  and  qual- 
ity— and  out  of  this  cloth  they  make  their  white 
robes.  A  sample  of  this  cloth  was  brought  here 
on  this  earth  realm  for  inspection  and  examination 
then  placed  in  a  sealed  envelope — within  a  day 
disintegrated  and  of  course  dissappeared.  The 


79 


atoms  of  this  triangular  piece  of  cloth  were  gath- 
ered the  night  previous  and  woven  just  before 
bringing  it  to  this  earth  for  inspection. 

Here  you  will  see  the  chemists  weave  all  sorts 
of  lazy  fabrics  and  many  sheer  gauzy  materials — 
in  fact  all  kinds  of  paraphernalia.  Your  needs, 
your  desires  and  all  your  requirements  are  here 
supplied.  As  we  are  functioning  through  a  body 
that  is  still  quite  dense,  or  very  material,  corres- 
ponding with  this  Zone — our  requirements  are 
many  and  some  very  similar  to  those  on  this  earth 
realm. 

In  rambling  through  this  Zone,  you  will  lind 
fields  of  grain  and  orchards  of  fruits — apples, 
pears,  grapes,  berries,  plums  and  others — not  just 
like  those  we  have  here — as  the  vibrations  are 
quite  different  from  these  in  which  we  are  existing 
on  this  mundane  sphere — so  they  only  resemble 
these  that  we  know  as  such.  Here  we  find  some 
more  bread  fruit — somewhat  different  from  that 
found  in  the  Second  Zone.  Its  much  more  delicious 
when  sliced,  it  looks  like  bread. 

If  we  were  educated  in  natural  laws — and  in 
mind,  would  get  away  from  the  intense 
attachments  we  form  for  material  things  and  our 
material  environments — and  if  we  would  unfold 
higher  degrees  of  consciousness,  we  could  take 
many  Soul  journeys  to  this  Third  Zone  and  to  the 
Second — and  consciously  function  there — and 
visit  with  our  friends  and  dwellers.  This,  under 
the  proper  conditions  could  be  done  with  much 

80 


less  effort  than  to  go  from  coast  to  coast  while 
we  are  functioning  in  our  physical  body.  Indeed 
there  are  those  who  go  there  and  consciously  enjoy 
their  environments  and  a  visit  to  their  Temples 
of  Learning  and  bring  back  knowledge  and  food 
for  thought.  If  you  are  sufficiently  unfolded,  you 
may  not  only  enjoy  a  delightful  visit  but  partake 
of  some  delicious  luncheon  spread  out  on  a  nice 
white  cloth  on  the  lawn  where  the  balmy  breezes 
would  waft  the  aroma  of  the  sweet  flowers  into 
your  atmosphere — or  you  might  take  a  stroll  with 
them  in  their  beautiful  gardens  with  their  artistic 
settings  and  continue  your  visit  while  reclining 
on  som\e  benches  under  the  spreading  branches 
of  an  apple  tree  laden  with  delicious  apples — 
and  at  the  same  time  enjoy  the  beds  of  roses, 
pansies,  violets,  sweet  peas,  daisies,  cosmos,  dah- 
lias, morning  glories,  honeysuckle,  nasturtiums, 
f  usias,  Martha  Washington,  Shasta  daisies,  Asalia, 
Boug-ainvillea  and  many  others.  (Violets  and  pan- 
sies are  from  18  to  27  inches  high  ) 

As  you  continue  your  walk  into  fields  of  flowers 
nearby  you  may  be  seated  on  a  large  rock  with 
sufficient  surface  to  accomodate  at  least  two  or 
three  of  you.  Here  you  may  extend  your  vision 
to  the  beautiful  mountains  in  the  distance  and 
valleys  below  or  note  some  beautiful  imposing 
structure  in  the  distance  while  listening  to  the 
cooing  and  chirping  of  the  birds  and  watching 
the  charming  exquisite  butterflies  going  back  and 
forth.  Near  your  path  you  will  note  many  creep- 

81 


ing  creatures.  Some  peculiar  looking  animal  whose 
body  looks  like  a  medium  sized  seal  in  weight 
dragging  itself  along  the  grass.  While  looking 
upon  the  branches  of  some  shrubbery  near  by 
you  will  notice  a  most  charming  creature  shaped 
like  a  squirrel  with  a  much  longer  body  and  larger 
with  its  downy  soft  white  hair  standing  up  about 
two  inches — your  first  impulse  will  be  to  rush 
to  it  that  you  may  touch  that  soft,  pretty  white 
hair.  Many  more,  just  as  wonderful  will  cross 
your  path,  all  ahving  a  charm  of  their  own.  Now 
let  us  wander  into  some  of  their  parks  with 
their  small  lakes  and  gushing  fountains  surround- 
ed with  pond  lilies,  near  by  are  bergonias,  trellises 
covered  with  clematis,  surrounded  by  ferns,  prim- 
roses, Hibiscus  Rosea,  pink  geraniums,  an  acacia 
tree,  and  as  we  descend  the  stone  steps  leading 
down  to  some  murmuring  stream,  we  find  trees, 
shrubbery,  ferns  on  either  side.  Going  along  the 
various  winding  paths  watching  the  pedestrians 
and  nearby  others  in  groups  in  some  cozy  nook, 
surrounded  by  roses — and  here  in  another  inviting 
spot  under  the  drooping  branches  of  a  pepper  tree, 
gazing  at  a  bed  of  gladiolas  in  all  their  beautiful 
colorings,  you  can  hear  two  lovers  telling  the  tales 
of  their  own  experiences ;  and  lying  at  their  side  is 
a  beautiful  pet  dog  or  some  other  pet  animal  per- 
fectly contented  in  their  magnetfc-  aura. 

So  you  will  find  that  while  life  and  its  activity 
here  in  this  Third  Zone  is  quite  different  in  many 
respects — yet  their  are  so  many  similar  features — 

82 


so  many  similar  attractions,  all  of  which  are  a 
great  necessity  for  the  Soul's  unfoldment  as  we 
must  continue  our  experiences  where  we  left  off  in 
our  last  step  of  progression  and  through  those 
awaken  into  higher  ideals  and  expand  into  higher 
degrees  of  consciousness,  that  our  vision  will  grow 
clearer,  extend  into  broader  fields  and  more  sub- 
lime realities — until  by  and  by  we  shall  behold  the 
glories  of  God's  Handiwork  and  bask  in  the  Illu- 
mination of  His  Eternal  Cty. 

Now  let  us  take  a  view  of  the  Homes  in  this 
section  of  the  World  of  Soul-and  here  you  will 
find  many  varieties,  all  constructed  of  wood — some 
few  Large  White  Buildings  of  stone  but  these  are 
not  private  homes.  (These  Buildings  look  like 
stone  but  it  is  a  different  substance.) 

Many  of  these  private  homes  are  covered  with 
climbing  Vines  and  flowers — and  you  will  find 
after  going  through  the  second  Zone  that  these 
homes  are  much  more  beautiful,  more  spacious  and 
by  far  more  cozy — more  comfortable  and  much 
more  complete — they  have  their  music  room — 
dining  room,  rest  rooms,  drawing  rooms,  recep- 
tion halls  and  porches — all  cozily  and  beautifully 
furnished.  Much  of  the  furniture  resembles  such 
as  we  see  here  in  our  well  furnished  homes  with 
their  large  arbors  of  flowers  and  trellises  covered 
with  climbing  roses  that  stretch  across  like  a 
fence  and  these  roses  are  of  many  varieties  and 
colors — pinks,  reds,  yellows.  You  will  find  Artis- 
tic settings  everywhere — their  homes — their 

83 


public  buildings  in  their  parks  and  everything  is 
by  far  more  beautiful  than  anything  found  on  this 
Earth  realm — Every  Zone  has  its  own  species  and 
varieties  of  flowers  all  of  which  are  much  more 
matured.  Roses  are  found  in  every  Zone,  but 
each  Zone  has  its  own  special  variety. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  this  Zone  is  in  a 
Higher  Vibration  than  our  Earth  realm,  conse- 
quently everything  is  of  a  much  more  refined 
nature  than  anything  that  we  find  here.  So  in 
comparison  with  our  Earth  realm,  all  is  so  much 
more  beautiful — all  is  more  ideal — more  spiritual. 
The  first  gradation  of  this  Zone  might  be  com- 
pared with  the  Highest  in  this  expression  of  life. 
There  are  however  a  few  exceptions  and  such  souls 
have  evolved  higher  degrees  of  consciousness  and 
are  attaining  the  knowledge  of  the  Fourth  and 
Fifth  Zones  and  will  gravitate  to  the  Fourth,  when 
they  make  the  transition  called  death.  We  must 
be  very  spiritual  and  unselfishly  serve  humanity 
and  assimulate  and  thoroughly  understand  God's 
laws,  ere  we  climb  to  the  Fourth  Zone. 

There  are  many  brilliant,  highly  intellectual  in- 
dividuals but  very  few  are  spiritual — They  have 
Developed  their  intelectual  faculties  but  have  not 
unfolded  their  Soul  senses  and  Soul  perceptions — 
hence  they  do  not  Vibrate  beyond  the  limitations 
of  the  physical  senses  and  their  consciousness 
which  is  the  light  of  the  Soul  does  not  radiate  and 
cannot  penetrate  beyond  the  veil  which  hides  from 
view  the  higher  realms — hence  they  are  not  cog- 

84 


nizant  of  that  which  exists  beyond  the  material 
vibrations  which  are  like  a  screen  that  obstructs 
our  view.  : 

There  are  few  on  this  plane  who  have  evolved 
their  Soul  senses  and  Soul  perceptions,  but  cannot 
intelligently  impart  that  which  they  feel.  Event- 
ually we  must  become  balanced  and  the  advantages 
in  the  lower  Zones  give  us  the  opportunities  of 
the  fulfilment  of  that  which  was  neglected  that 
we  may  attain  this  balance.  We  cannot  know  God 
and  His  Laws  through  the  Intelect  or  the  Mind — 
we  can  only  know  God  and  His  Laws  through  the 
Spirit  or  Soul  perception.  God  is  Spiri;  and  you 
are  SPIRIT  and  you  can  only  know  Hitr  in  Spirit. 

Being  spiritual  and  being  sanctimonious  are  two 
different  things.  Spirituality  implies  right  living, 
right  thinking — evolving  the  Divine  Love  within 
and  unselfishly  serving  Humanity  regardless  of 
color,  race  or  belief.  The  most  of  us  are  practicing 
churchianity  instead  of  Christianity  and  sancti- 
mony instead  of  spirituality — all  of  which  create 
vibrations  of  their  own  which  form  a  material 
garment  around  us — then  how  could  we  gravitate 
to  a  world  of  Soul  whose  atmosphere  vibrates  in 
higher  octaves  than  those  of  our  Soul  vibration. 

Or  how  could  one  whose  Soul  is  filled  with  the 
vibrations  of  lust,  vice,  jealousy,  hatred,  greed 
egotism  and  revenge  exist  even  a  day  in  an  at- 
mosphere of  purity,  justice,  righteousness  and 
Divine  Love.  Absolutely  imposible. 

All  must  become  cleansed,  purified  and  edu- 

85 


cated — not  educated  in  man  made  Laws — but  in 
Nature's  Laws  which  are  God's  laws. 

In  this  third  Zone  you  will  find  Temples  of 
Learning  where  all  are  educated  along  the  lines 
that  are  necessary  for  the  Souls  unfoldment  and 
our  continuous  progression.  So  essential  are  Mus- 
ic, Art  and  the  understanding  of  Natural  Laws, 
that  they  are  taught  in  every  Zone.  The  Law  of 
Vibration,  the  Law  of  Evolution,  the  Sciences  or 
Spiritual  anology — and  like  the  child  that  must 
learn  its  A  B  C — we  must  gather  the  substance 
that  will  help  us  to  build  our  foundation  ere  we  are 
ready  for  the  constructive  flow  of  Wisdom  that 
awaits  us  in  our  ascension.  We  must  be  able  to 
digest  the  milk  ere  we  can  expect  to  assimilate  the 
cream. 

After  having  passed  from  the  darkness  of  the 
First  Zone  into  the  Dawn  of  the  Second  Zone  and 
from  the  Dawn  of  the  Second  into  the  Light  of  the 
Third,  the  dweller  here  is  susceptible  and  conscious 
of  the  First  touch  of  a  spiritual  atmosphere  and 
enjoys  the  golden  and  direct  rays  of  the  Same  Sun 
that  lights  the  path  for  the  traveller  on  the  Earth 
withall  the  beauties  that  nature  displays.  In  this 
Zone,  the  Soul  becomes  quickened  into  an  awak- 
ening of  the  many  steps  of  ascension  that  lies 
before  us. 

The  new  born  Souls  are  like  infants ;  they  must 
be  watched  and  taken  care  of.  About  the  first 
thing  that  confronts  you  is  the  Law  of  attraction. 
You  will  find  yourself  attracted  to  some  distant 

86 


scenery — which  creates  a  strong  desire  to  go 
there — but  after  your  arrival,  a  sudden  fear  over- 
comes you  and  you  wonder  how  you  got  there  and 
how  can  I  find  my  way  back.  The  Teacher  in 
whose  care  you  have  been  placed  immediately 
senses  your  anxiety  and  comes  to  your  rescue 
teaching  you  that  the  same  Law  which  took  you 
there  will  bring  you  back.  The  modus  operandi 
is  to  create  a  desire  through  the  Power  of  your 
Will  to  get  back. 

Many  times  the  friends  or  relatives  from  this 
earth  realm  are  strongly  thinking  of  those  who 
have  passed  ON — this  powerful  vibration  attracts 
them  back — (All  thoughts  are  vibrations)  to  those 
who  are  thinking  of  them  and  again  they  find  them- 
selves attached  to  the  friends  and  their  environ- 
ments by  the  power  of  their  thought  force,  and 
as  they  do  not  yet  understand  the  Law  they  do 
not  know  how  to  extricate  themselves — and  again 
the  Teacher  comes  to  the  rescue.  Through  such 
experiences  they  learn  and  realize  the  necessity  of 
understanding  the  Law  that  governs  our  Being — 
the  Power  of  thought — the  Law  of  attraction  and 
how  to  master  these  vibrations  and  how  to  master 
themselves. 

Their  coming  and  going  cannot  be  prevented — 
it  is  a  Natural  Law — God's  Law — not  man  made 
Law — hence  no  one  has  yet  been  able  to  bar  the 
way  for  the  going  and  the  coming  and  this  Law  has 
existed  since  the  begining  of  creation  and  will 
ever  exist.  If  we  understood  Natural  Laws,  all 


87 


superstition  would  vanish.  All  Souls  can  and  do 
return  to  this  earth  realm  "at  will"  when  they 
understand  the  law — but  through  attraction — so 
long  as  they  do  not  understand  the  law — and  this 
is  caused  by  the  thoughts  sent  out  by  those  who 
are  left  on  this  earth  realm. 

There  are  Temples  of  Learning  in  which  the 
new  born  Souls  are  educated — they  are  taught  how 
to  protect  themselves  and  the  friends  or  relatives 
who  attract  them  back  into  their  atmosphere. 
They  must  learn  the  Law  of  Vibration  and  how 
to  leave  a  beneficent  uplifting  influence  with  all 
whom  they  come  in  contact  with.  They  must  learn 
to  realize  the  sacred  priveledges  through  God's 
Laws  and  thus  never  to  abuse  them  but  always  to 
use  them  for  the  benefit  and  uplift  of  other  Souls. 
They  must  learn  to  travel  at  will  and  are  privel- 
eged  to  go  anywhere  they  desire  and  wherever 
they  choose.  There  is  nothing  whatever  to  hinder 
them  from  descending  through  the  Same  Path  that 
was  open  for  their  going,  but  none  can  Ascend  to 
higher  realms  than  their  Soul  vibration  attracts 
them.  So  All  are  limited  in  their  ascension  to  the 
Range  of  their  Vibration  and  chemical  constituents 
of  their  Soul  which  constitutes  their  degree  of 
unfoldment. 

These  are  facts  which  the  finite  Mind  must 
sometime  realize.  Whether  we  believe  them  or 
disbelieve  them  does  not  alter  the  fact,  There 
are  absolutely  no  exceptions  and  no  favors  shown 
in  God's  Kingdom.  His  Laws  are  Immutable  and 

88 


Unchangeable— and  no  man  can  change  Qod's  laws 
or  His  Plan.  So  let  us  wake  up  and  face  this  issue 
which  concerns  us  all  and  remember  that  if  we  go 
to  the  world  of  Soul — or  as  Jesus  the  Nazarene 
says  "His  Father's  Mansions"  then  we  surely  can 
return  in  the  same  path  through  the  same  law. 

Death  is  but  another  event  of  life — a  birth  into 
another  scene  of  action  in  a  world  v/here  the 
activity  is  even  greater  than  that  on  this  earth 
realm.  In  this  world,  we  prepare  ourselves  for 
something  better  than  we  have  already  attained. 
Evolution  is  a  slow  but  sure  process  and  there  are 
no  breaks  in  the  chain — always  beginning  in  either 
expression  just  where  we  left  off.  We  have  built 
our  own  character  and  this  is  what  we  take  with 
us.  We  are  today  the  sum  total  of  all  the  past 
plus  the  present  created  through  our  thinking — 
this  is  what  we  call  our  character.  It  is  this  that 
we  take  with  us — because  it  is  a  part  of  ourselves, 
in  fact  is  our  Self. 

We  change  our  garments  and  can  overcome 
Self — but  we  can  not  loose  ourselves  or  run  away 
from  ourselves.  So  we  must  gravitate  to  a  place 
that  is  suitable  for  our  habitation  and  which 
provides  the  conditions  for  the  fulfilment  of  the 
next  step  in  our  life  ere  we  can  ascend  to  such 
Heights  where  the  requirements  are  such  that  we 
could  not  in  our  present  state  of  unfoldment  fulfill. 
God  in  His  Wisdom  and  through  His  Divine  Love 
has  arranged  such  places  for  us — so  that  every 
Soul  will  share  alike  His  blessings  in  the  measure 


89 


that  they  are  adapted  for  them — and  He  has 
provided  the  opportunity  to  fit  ourselves  for  the 
enjoyment  of  His  blessings  through  His  Divine 
Plan.  And  in  the  world  of  Soul  each  in  his  own 
degree  of  consciousness,  sings  out  his  praises  to 
the  Lord  in  their  Temples  of  Worship — Each  is 
Conscious  of  His  Divine  Presence  to  the  degree 
of  His  Perception. 

The  interaction  of  the  Ethereal  World  with  this 
Material  World  is  as  natural  as  day  and  night — as 
natural  as  life  itself — for  all  are  interlinked 
through  the  golden  threads  of  Divine  Love  and 
within  these  lie  the  Power  af  ATTRACTION  and 
as  we  cannot  get  away  from  this  Power,  we  cannot 
separate  the  two  worlds  and  it  is  through  this  in- 
teraction that  both  worlds  are  sustained.  This 
Power  grows  stronger  as  we  advance  to  higher 
degrees  of  Consciousness  as  then  we  have  a  clearer 
vision  of  the  Reality  of  our  Kinship  with  each 
other  and  everything  in  the  Universe  and  with 
Him  who  is  the  Father  over  All. 

Humanity  must  learn  to  realize  that  all  the 
harm  and  danger  that  has  ever  manifested  itself 
in  either  world  has  been  directly  caused  through 
their  thinking  and  has  always  been  promulgated 
in  the  Finite  Mind.  These  vibrations  reach  out  to 
the  World  of  Soul — especially  are  the  First,  Sec- 
ond and  Third  Zones  affected  by  these  thought 
vibrations  and  within  these  thought  vibrations 
lies  the  Power  of  Attratcion — which  no  mortal 
Mind  can  change  except  through  your  thinking. 

90 


It  is  through  your  thinking  that  you  attract  all  the 
disagreeable  circumstances  and  the  undesirable 
beings  on  this  Earth  realm.  It  is  through 
your  thinking  that  you  create  all  the  agreeable 
and  disagreeable  circumstances  and  conditions  of 
life.  It  is  through  your  thinking  that  you  attract 
agreeable  or  disagreeable  conditions  from  the 
Lower  Zones  of  the  World  of  Soul. 

It  is  through  your  thinking  that  you  retard  the 
growth  of  the  excarnate  Souls  in  these  lower  belts. 
All  the  dangers  and  all  the  mistakes  that  have 
ever  existed  have  come  through  our  Mortal  Minds. 
Every  secret  thought  has  its  vibration  and  Power 
of  attraction — every  scandal — vice — fraud — theft 
— and  crime  that  you  read  about  in  your  daily 
papers  sends  out  a  vibration  of  its  own  kind  and 
you  attract  to  you  of  like  quality — and  if  you  be- 
come aware  of  its  results  you  blame  the  world  of 
Soul  or  the  disembodied  Souls  whom  you  have 
attracted,  in  fact  drawn  into  your  atmosphere  and 
hold  them  there — just  like  the  magnet  that  picks 
up  the  nail  and  hugs  it  close. 

So  your  thoughts  are  the  magnetic  Power  which 
attracts  to  you  and  holds  to  you  either  the  good 
or  the  evil.  Evil  is  only  undeveloped  good.  If  you 
wish  to  elevate  yourself  and  this  material  world 
then  change  your  thinking.  Elevate  your 
thoughts.  Refuse  to  waste  your  time  reading 
news  that  create  destructive  vibrations  -and  de- 
termine to  send  forth  the  thoughts  that  produce 
Constructive  Vibrations.  As  you  send  forth  con- 


91 


structive  Vibrations  you  not  only  Elevate  your- 
self, but  you  are  educating  and  assisting  the  In- 
visible Beings  all  around  you  and  by  and  by  we 
would  not  have  a  dark  Zone.  These  excarnate 
intelligences  are  only  invisible  because  you  are  not 
attuned  to  their  Vibration.  Just  remember,  every 
mortal,  no  matter  what  his  degree  of  Intelligence 
may  be  in  the  Mortal  body — he  is  of  that  same 
degree  of  consciousness — same  degree  of  Intelli- 
gence when  he  has  left  the  physical  body  to  func- 
tion in  his  Soul  body.  His  memory,  his  power  of 
activity  is  just  as  intense  as  it  was  while  function- 
ing in  His  Mortal  body. 

No  one  has  ever  yet  been  able  to  get  away  from 
the  Reality  of  these  facts  by  denying  them.  Every 
mortal  would  be  instrumental  in  clarifying  and 
purifying  the  conditions  of  this  Earth  realm — if 
we  would  face  these  facts  with  a  clear  conscience 
and  be  as  careful  of  our  secret  thoughts  and  acts 
as  we  are  of  those  which  we  voice.  Then  this 
Earth  would  become  fit  for  Democracy  and  justice 
and  righteousness  would  prevail  on  this  Earth 
realm. 

None  can  abide  on  this  Earth  realm  ''ndefinitely. 
All  must  make  the  change  called  death  some  time 
— any  hour  or  any  day  may  be  your  time  to  make 
the  transition  and  if  you  do  not  recognize  God's 
Law  and  His  plan  while  encased  in  this  physical 
body,  you  must  face  these  facts  when  you  pass 
from  this  scene  of  activity  into  the  next.  Abso- 
lutely nothing  to  prevent  it.  Therefore,  let  us  be 

92 


one  to  help  Uplift  the  World  rather  than  retard 
its  growth  through  our  prejudices — our  supersti- 
tion, negligence,  hypocrisy  and  Egotism — and  thus 
Uplift  ourselves — which  would  be  a  natural  result. 
The  reaction  of  our  actions,  which  would  broaden 
our  vision,  intensify  our  Intuition  and  Perception. 

The  time  is  close  at  hand  when  the  dark  dense 
clouds  which  have  hovered  over  the  earth  for  so 
many  years  will  gradually  disappear  and  humanity 
will  see  the  light  that  radiates  from  a  Divine 
Source  and  those  who  are  ready  will  absorb  the 
Wisdom  that  flows  so  freely  from  the  Heavenly 
Kingdoms  as  was  the  case  in  the  days  of  the  Atlan- 
tians,  who  had  direct  communication  with  the 
dwellers  of  the  Heavenly  and  Divine  Kingdoms — 
and  these  were  the  most  highly  advanced  people 
of  any  who  ever  dwelled  on  this  Earth,  whose  rec- 
ords disappeared  under  the  waves  of  the  Atlantic 
Ocean  but  are  preserved  in  the  Soul  World. 

Just  at  this  time  more  than  ever  before  in  the 
History  of  the  World  has  it  become  necessary  to 
arouse  ourselves  into  a  recognition  of  these  facts 
— as  we  can  not  hinder  the  millions  of  new-born 
Souls  who  have  been  cast  into  the  World  of  Soul 
through  this  terrible  War,  through  accidents,  epi- 
demics, fire,  and  other  causes  from  coming  back. 
They  will  be  attracted  here  through  their  relatives 
and  friends  and  other  causes.  We  have  nothing 
to  fear,  but  it  behooves  us  to  send  out  the  right 
vibrations — through  the  right  thinking  and  thus 
assist  them  and  protect  ourselves.  Ignorance  is 

93 


the  most  deplorable  condition  in  our  world.  Igno- 
rance of  God's  Laws  has  created  Egotism,  selfish- 
ness and  all  the  mistakes  that  the  human  family 
has  been  guilty  of. 

A  few  of  the  new-born  Souls  who  were  cast  out 
through  the  War  have  been  placed  in  this  Zone- 
but  not  many.  There  is  much  need  for  Education 
and  Spiritual  Uplift  in  the  Lower  Zones. 

Now  let  us  wander  out  once  more  to  investigate 
the  different  parts  of  this  Zone.  As  we  stroll  along 
our  attention  is  attracted  to  a  lonely  spot  at  the 
extreme  point  of  the  road  from  which  we  started. 
As  we  draw  closer  our  curiosity  is  aroused  at  the 
sight  of  the  many  Souls  standing  on  guard  of  a 
certain  corner  of  this  lonely  barren  uncultivated 
tract.  On  investigation  we  find  here  exists  a 
colony  of  Men  who  call  themselves  a  Brotherhood 
— consisting  of  about  3,000  MEN.  These  souls 
have  been  living  here  in  darkness  under  the  delu- 
sion that  woman  is  the  downfall  of  man  (as  you 
will  find  it  so  stated  in  portions  of  the  scriptures) 
and  that  if  man  took  unto  himself  a  wife  he  could 
not  enter  the  Kingdom  of  Heaven.  These  men 
were  married,  had  their  families  while  here  on 
this  mortal  plane  and  when  they  passed  out  of  the 
physical  body  into  the  world  of  Soul,  they  expect- 
ed to  find  God  and  the  Heaven  which  had  been 
indellibly  imprinted  upon  their  minds.  When  they 
did  not  find  anything  to  correspond  with  what 
they  were  taught  to  expect,  they  concluded  they 
were  here  in  waiting  because  they  had  disobeyed 

94 


God's  Law  by  marrying  and  connecting  with 
woman — so  they  decided  to  keep  away  from 
woman  the  rest  of  their  days.  Woman  could  not 
come  near  them;  they  would  not  tolerate  her  in 
any  way  whatever — they  settled  in  this  lonely 
spot  all  by  themselves.  They  built  a  little  hut  of 
one  room,  front  porch,  bare  floors,  board  wall  and 
ceiling.  Each  had  a  hut  of  their  own.  These  were 
close  together  in  rows  with  a  narrow  street  be- 
tween each  row.  Here  they  did  their  own  cooking, 
attended  to  their  own  duties.  Neither  man  nor 
woman  could  ever  go  near.  Only  those  of  the 
same  faith  and  belief  gravitated  into  that  atmos- 
phere. Their  Souls  had  become  bitter  through 
the  chemicalization  of  their  own  thoughts  and 
beliefs,  and  these  vibrations  saturated  everything 
around  them — even  their  food.  This  Brotherhood 
has  existed  for  hundreds  of  years  in  this  Zone  in 
that  very  spot  unmolested  except  by  those  who 
from  time  to  time  tried  to  show  them  the  right 
way. 

This  colony  was  guarded  by  their  own  kind 
three  and  four  rows  deep  all  around  so  that  no  one 
could  enter  except  their  own.  They  never  ven- 
tured out  of  this  enclosure,  never  investigated  the 
surroundings  or  communicated  with  anyone  only 
their  kind.  From  time  to  time  the  higher  Intel- 
ligences tried  to  gain  admittance,  tried  to  get  a 
hearing  that  they  might  gain  their  confidence  and 
thus  awaken  them  out  of  their  darkened  condi- 
tions, never  succeeding  in  their  attempts.  Finally 

95 


a  few  years  ago  Dr.  Sharp  the  intelligence  from 
the  Seventh  Zone  determined  to  show  them  the 
Light  and  rouse  them  out  of  their  lethargy.  These 
Souls  from  the  Seventh  Zone  are  Brilliantly 
Illuminated  radiating  a  most  wonderful  Power. 
Their  vibrations  are  an  uplifting  influence  where 
ere  they  go.  This  powerful  soul  gained  admit- 
tance, assuring  them  of  God's  wonderful  plan  of 
unfoldment  and  of  His  Love  and  Power  manifest- 
ed throughout  Nature  as  well  as  in  the  Soul  of 
Man,  and  that  if  they  will  only  tear  asunder  the 
veil  of  delusion,  that  was  hiding  the  realities  of 
life  from  their  view,  they  would  be  happier  &nd 
would  in  time  progress  to  the  beautiful  Heavenly 
Mansion  from  whence  he  came.  Also  assuring 
them  of  his  assistance  on  their  march  of  progres- 
sion. As  he  left  their  midst,  one  went  with  him 
to  investigate  and  then  another  and  another  until 
in  the  course  of  a  year  the  colony  had  disbanded 
and  were  on  their  way  towards  the  Eternal  Day. 
Things  now  presented  themselves  in  their  con- 
sciousness as  never  before  and  they  were  on  their 
way  rejoicing — grateful  and  thankful  for  the 
awakening.  Man  being  the  positive,  aggressive, 
conquering  element  lacks  the  finer  qualities  that 
woman  possesses.  She  being  the  conservative  ele- 
ment is  naturally  more  refined.  One  could  almost 
Imagine  the  condition  of  Mind  these  individuals 
possessed  after  living  in  seclusion  these  many 
years,  never  mingling  even  in  thought  with  the 


96 


finer  vibrations.  Just  think  how  much  these  Souls 
had  to  overcome  after  their  awakening. 

This  is  only  one  example  of  the  effects  upon  the 
Soul  of  the  misconceptions  caused  by  the  various 
erroneous  teachings  of  the  Mortal  Mind.  These 
ideas  become  indelibly  impressed  upon  our  con- 
sciousness and  retard  the  growth  of  the  Soul  for 
many  years.  As  every  action  has  its  reaction,  a 
great  responsibility  rests  with  those  who  promul- 
gate the  Individualized  and  usually  commercialized 
centers  with  their  delusions. 

Now  as  we  extend  our  ramble  back  in  another 
direction,  towards  the  center  of  the  city  we  are 
thrilled  with  the  most  exquisite  peals  from  the 
most  beautiful  chimes — whose  vibrations  pene- 
trate every  atom  of  our  being  which  quicken  the 
Soul  into  praises  for  the  joy  of  these  charming 
sweet  vibrations.  These  are  heard  from  day  to  day 
ringing  out  far  and  wide  and  many  on  this  Mortal 
plane  have  heard  the  echoes  of  these  soft  harmon- 
ious strains  as  they  resound  from  this  Magnificent 
CATHEDRAL  situated  near  the  center  of  this 
City.  As  we  recline  upon  the  grass  of  some  beau- 
tiful nook,  or  sit  on  the  stone  steps  leading  to  a 
ravine  below,  or  perhaps  under  the  spreading 
branches  of  some  beautiful  tree  with  its  white 
blossoms,  the  echo  is  heard  coming  from  great 
distances  like  a  Divine  message  for  the  Soul. 
In  this  Zone,  the  teachers  gather  these  vibrations, 
bottle  them  and  preserve  them  for  use  as  the 
conditions  demand.  All  work  here  is  done  through 


97 


vibrations  and  the  Law  of  Vibration,  in  fact  no- 
thing con  be  accomplished  except  through  the  right 
Vibration. 

As  we  were  strolling  through  the  Second  Zones 
we  found  many  churches  for  worship  and  we  had 
no  trouble  in  finding  one  which  harmonized  with 
our  special  belief  or  our  so-called  science  or  in 
fact  any  type  of  worship  we  desired  but  ere  we 
left  the  second  Zone  a  clearer  vision  dawned  upon 
our  consciousness  and  we  no  longer  entertained 
beliefs.  Within  our  Soul  had  been  kindled  a 
desire  for  facts.  We  have  discarded  the  dense 
garment  that  obstructed  our  vision  and  as  the 
veil  of  delusion  has  been  lifted,  we  see  ourselves 
and  our  requirements  in  a  different  light.  So 
we  are  not  surprised  to  find  no  churches  here  as 
they  are  no  longer  a  necessity. 

Our  various  beliefs  are  BECOMING  unified 
through  our  experiences  and  education  of  facts  as 
seen  in  Nature — and  as  we  are  here  receiving  our 
first  lessons  in  Spiritual  chemistry,  it  has  a  won- 
derful effect  upon  our  dormant  consciousness  and 
we  feel  no  hesitancy  in  our  new  form  of  worship 
in  fact  it  all  seems  so  strange  that  we  had  not 
seen  the  light  before.  We  are  so  joyful  and  thank- 
ful for  the  broader  Vision.  How  much  more  ex- 
hilerating  and  uplifting  are  the  wonderful  services 
conducted  by  Masters  of  Wisdom  in  this  Zone 
whose  Spiritual  analogy  is  so  simplified  that  all 
may  absorb  its  facts — and  their  praises  to  the 
Lord  are  so  effectual  that  the  Soul  longs  for  these 

98 


vibrations  and  longs  to  be  awakened  into  still 
higher  degrees  of  consciousness. 

When  we  once  get  a  full  taste  of  these  vibrations 
that  are  the  elixir  of  life,  we  anxiously  await  our 
turn  to  enter  the  Temples  of  learning  for  our  in- 
structions. 

We  anxiously  wait  to  be  in  the  presence  of 
these  Divine  Masters  and  teachers  whose  illumin- 
ation and  flow  of  knowledge  is  a  great  uplift. 
Their  tender  kindly  interest  with  the  Divine  Love 
that  radiates  from  their  Soul  permeates  these 
Temples  and  all  who  enter  here  realize  in  a  greater 
degree  God's  Wisdom. 

In  this  Zone  you  will  find  the  first  Library,  as 
in  the  Second  Zone  we  had  only  reading  rooms. 
Here  we  have  a  library  of  many  thousand  volumes 
upon  various  subjects — treating  of  the  elementary 
substance  in  every  branch  and  along  every  line — 
as  it  must  be  remembered  here  we  are  just  be- 
ginning to  assimilate  Spiritual  food.  Our  methods 
and  requirements  of  education  of  the  earth  realm 
are  not  altogether  conductive  for  Soul  unfoldment. 
Since  Natural  Laws  confront  us  in  every  direction 
in  the  Ethereal  World,  our  education  must  begin 
along  these  lines.  Among  the  books  which  you 
will  find  in  this  library  will  be  such  as  will  reveal 
the  language  of  the  flowers,  the  Silent  Thinkers. 
Each  has  a  language  of  its  own  radiating  its  own 
vibrations.  Here  the  teachers  will  take  you  out 
where  there  are  fields  of  flowers  and  teach  you 
how  to  paint  them  in  your  own  color  vibrations. 


99 


Here  you  learn  that  you  vibrate  with  the  flowers 
and  that  you  are  radiating  your  own  particular 
color  or  shade. 

As  you  take  notice  of  the  leaves  and  petals,  you 
will  find  God's  sacred  numbers  expressed  in  the 
various  kinds  (the  ancient  mystics  called  them 
sacred  numbers)  You  will  come  in  contact  with 
many  who  are  well  advanced  in  the  various  arts 
as  dwellers  of  this  Zone.  You  will  note  their 
artistic  temperment  in  their  attire  and  mode  of 
living. 

You  can  immediately  distinguish  an  Artist  from 
any  other  class  of  Intelligences.  In  their  ordinary 
requirements,  the  dwellers  of  this  Zone  dress  very 
much  as  our  well  groomed  people  do  here,  dressing 
in  the  colors  and  styles  suited  to  their  individual 
tastes. 

If  you  were  invited  into  their  beautiful  Art 
Building  you  might  sit  for  hours  and  hours  look- 
ing at  the  wonderful  productions,  many  of  which 
have  been  handed  down  to  this  Earth.  Here  you 
will  find  scenery  from  the  higher  Zones  which 
were  painted  by  the  Masters  in  the  Fifth  Zone. 
Most  wonderful  pictures  of  noted  personages,  mas- 
ter pieces  of  the  various  Messiahs,  statuary  in 
full  form  and  busts  of  various  artists,  poets,  sci- 
entists and  philosophers.  There  are  various  apart- 
ments in  this  building  and  all  Art  is  classified 
according  to  the  degree  of  perfection.  All  of  these 
exhibitions  are  to  prepare  the  Mind  for  that  which 
will  in  time  be  unfolded  and  for  that  which  they 

100 


will  meet  as  they  enter  into  higher  and  higher 
conditions  of  life  or  degrees  of  unf oldment.  This 
gives  them  some  conception  of  the  Sublime  Beau- 
ties of  the  Heavenly  Kingdoms  beyond,  informing 
their  minds  of  the  wonderful  souls  who  preceeded 
them  in  their  journey  through  this  world  of  Soul 
and  who  have  prepared  the  way  and  thus  have 
lightened  their  path. 

As  we  take  a  trip  to  some  of  the  mountains, 
we  find  many  indentations  in  the  sides  of  the 
mountains  where  the  soil  and  rock  has  broken 
away  and  the  river  beds  or  streams  have  changed 
their  course — some  entirely  dried  up — all  caused 
by  the  many  convulsions  of  this  planet. 

And  as  you  row  along  in  their  boats  or  sit  on  the 
banks  of  their  lakes  and  streams  you  may  find 
amusement  in  watching  the  fish  of  various  kinds, 
but  these  are  not  caught  and  used.  No  life  is 
molested  in  the  World  of  Soul — you  could  not 
destroy  them.  All  animals  in  these  Zones  are  a 
necessity — they  are  the  outburst  of  these  vibra- 
tions. All  animals  gravitate  to  a  center  of  their 
own  where  in  due  time  they  will  again  manifest  in 
other  forms. 

On  a  very  attractive  elevation  you  will  see  a 
Large  White  Structure  beautifully  surrounded  with 
flowers  of  various  kinds ;  roses,  violets,  lillies  of  the 
valley  in  great  profusion  and  other  kinds  and 
varieties.  In  this  Temple  are  rooms  fitted  up 
for  various  conditions  which  the  human  family 
are  heir  to.  For  instance,  if  you  are  suffering 

101 


from  exhaustion  you  can  be  brought  here  where 
you  would  be  placed  in  a  room  of  a  Solid  Mass 
of  Roses — exquisite  pink  roses.  This  beautiful 
structure  is  called  the  "Temple  of  Hope."  Here 
your  spirit  absorbs  the  vibrations  which  are  aglow 
with  life — in  fact,  are  life  itself.  You  absorb 
these  like  a  sponge  until  your  Soul  has  become 
quickened  with  its  recuperative  power.  These 
roses  will  never  wilt  or  die,  but  are  always  fresh 
and  alive,  radiating  their  aroma  and  vibration. 
Many  mortals  have  been  brought  here  and  cured, 
then  returned  to  function  in  their  physical  body. 
Some  have  been  conscious  of  this  treatment — 
others  never  know  what  cured  them.  One  room 
is  fitted  up  in  the  same  way  in  violets.  There  are 
various  apartments  or  rooms  fitted  up  for  the 
various  conditions.  The  essence  or  aroma  of  these 
flowers  are  a  Magical  Healing  balm. 

In  another  attractive  spot  in  the  Center  of  a 
beautiful  grove  is  a  Temple  for  Worship  with 
wings  built  on  either  side  a  porch  and  steps  lead- 
ing up  this  porch.  These  wings  on  the  side  are 
fitted  up  with  apartments  for  healing.  This  Tem- 
ple was  built  for  the  purpose  of  relieving  the  un- 
fortunate who  meet  with  accidents  on  this  Earth, 
and  who  will  continue  to  function  in  their  physical 
body.  The  Spirit  is  brought  here  and  carefully 
placed  on  a  couch  where  it  is  treated  by  the  best 
healers  in  the  World  of  Soul.  These  Healers  are 
Intelligences  who  have  progressed  to  higher 
realms  but  descend  to  this  Zone  to  relieve  and 


102 


care  for  the  individuals  who  are  brought  here. 
Only  those  who  will  return  to  this  earth  to  again 
function  in  their  physical  body  can  be  taken  to 
this  Temple.  After  they  have  been  treated  they 
pass  through  a  door  that  leads  onto  a  platform 
that  is  in  the  center  of  this  Hall,  which  is  used  for 
worship.  Here  on  such  occasions  many  intelli- 
gences flock  to  greet  the  mortal  who  was  healed 
in  their  healing  apartment.  It  is  a  rare  occur- 
ance  for  the  disembodied  Souls  to  be  privileged  to 
greet  an  individual  who  visits  this  realm,  as  com- 
paratively few  are  brought  here.  While  there  are 
many  on  the  Earth  who  are  conscious  of  the 
presence  of  the  disembodied  and  are  sufficiently 
unfolded  to  see  the  thousands  of  Souls  who  are 
constantly  traveling  back  and  forth.  This  Temple 
is  called  the  "Temple  of  Mercy." 

Then  we  find  here  another  Temple  where  those 
who  have  made  the  change  called  death  are  taken 
to  be  treated.  These  are  individuals  who  have 
suffered  for  many  years  and  suffered  much — 
which  has  left  its  effects  upon  the  Soul.  This 
Temple  is  called  the  "Temple  of  Life." 

Such  must  be  treated  ere  they  can  be  active  in 
this  world  of  Soul  where  the  activity  is  so  intense. 
So  here  they  are  tenderly  taken  care  of  and  the 
shattered  aura  is  quickened  into  perfect  equilib- 
rium. Then  after  your  first  spiritual  bath  you  are 
ready  to  pick  up  the  threads  and  start  where  you 
left  off  when  you  left  the  physical  body. 

If  on  this  mortal  plane  you  are  a  student  of 

103 


Natural  Law,  seeking  to  evolve  higher  degrees  of 
consciousness,  learning  the  power  of  thought,  the 
law  of  attraction  and  the  law  of  vibration  not  for 
any  selfish  purpose  but  for  the  uplift  of  the  Soul 
and  those  whom  you  come  in  contact  with :  If  you 
have  come  to  a  realization  of  these  facts,  you  will 
be  eligible  for  this  Third  Zone  and  will  find  your 
name  registered  in  the  Registration  room  in  this 
beautiful  Cathedral.  When  you  make  the  change 
called  death  or  are  born  into  the  world  of  Soul, 
you  will  not  be  a  stranger  in  a  strange  land,  but 
will  be  tenderly  and  kindly  greeted  by  the  Teach- 
ears  and  Helpers  of  this  Zone.  Such  is  the  Law 
as  carried  out  in  the  World  of  Soul. 

With  the  foregoing  before  us,  you  can  readily 
see  that  all  who  make  the  effort  to  live  a  spiritual 
life,  evolving  the  attributes  of  the  Soul  while  yet 
in  the  physical  body  are  preparing  themselves  for 
higher  and  better  conditions  in  the  Ethereal 
world. 

The  weary  traveller  now  beholds 

The  rising  glory  of  the  Sun 

Which  ne'er  again  can  cast  its  shadow 

Along  his  path  in  any  wrung. 

The  Songs  of  praise  reverberate 

From  every  living  tongue 

Who  now  in  joyful  harmony 

Send  forth  their  melody  in  Song. 

The  weary  traveller  now  beholds 
104 


The  Wisdom  in  our  Father's  plan 

And  hasten  to  ascend  beyond  the  realm 

Where  he  can  see  the  marks  of  time 

That  left  their  imprint  on  his  Soul 

Vanish  as  the  light  within  begins  to  shine, 

Gradually  revealing  facts  untold 

As  he  the  ladder  does  climb. 


105 


THE  FOURTH  ZONE 

THE    MUSICAL    BELT  OF   THE   ETHEREAL 
WORLD 

300,000  Miles  From  Our  Earth  Realm. 

Oh  Fatherhood— -Oh  Motherhood— Thou  who 
art  the  Essence  of  All  Life  and  Light — lead  us  and 
enlighten  us  that  we  may  know  the  work  that  is 
destined  for  us  in  this  life's  journey  of  hidden 
mysteries  and  grant  that  in  all  we  think  and  do 
we  may  radiate  a  power  for  good,  a  power  to  uplift 
mankind  into  a  Consciousness  of  Thy  Being  into 
a  realization  of  our  at-one-ness  with  Thee. 

When  you  have  become  eligible  to  enter  this 
Zone  about  the  first  thing  that  you  indulge  in  is  a 
Spiritual  Bath.  Such  a  thing  is  not  known  on  this 
Earth.  Between  the  Fourth  and  the  Fifth  Zone 
is  a  beautiful  Lake  whose  surface  is  so  smooth 
that  its  reflections  are  like  that  of  a  perfect  mirror. 


106 


This  lake  has  most  wonderful  medicinal  properties 
and  here  you  are  taken  for  a  plunge  in  this  mar- 
velous Lake  whose  medicinal  properties  dissolve  or 
cause  the  coarse  low  material  vibrations  which  are 
like  black  cobwebs  hanging  to  the  Soul  to  slough 
off. 

These  cobwebs-wrinkles  and  sharp  lines  which 
impress  themselves  on  our  features  are  caused 
by  our  thinking — our  emotions  and  actions.  In 
other  words  our  thoughts,  acts  and  deeds  are  reg- 
istered in  the  Soul  and  leave  their  imprint  upon 
the  physical  body. 

After  you  have  taken  your  bath  in  this  Magical 
Lake  and  see  yourself  reflected  in  its  mirror — you 
do  not  recognize  yourself  as  you  now  stand  here 
in  the  full  bloom  of  Youth.  Your  wrinkles — 
your  strong  lines — your  scars  or  defects  of  any 
kind  are  all  gone.  Your  Soul  has  been  cleansed 
of  a  cloudy  garment  of  cobwebs  the  material 
Vibrations  of  your  own  creation.  Now  one  more 
burden  has  been  lifted  from  your  Being.  You  feel 
lighter — freer — your  countenance  now  portrays  a 
smile  of  satisfaction.  Your  Soul  can  now  radiate 
its  Light  as  never  before.  Your  vision  is  clearer 
as  another  veil  has  been  lifted — or  some  of  the 
obstructions  have  been  removed  enabling  you  to 
now  perceive  that  which  was  hidden  from  view  by 
these  dense  material  Vibrations  around  you.  You 
now  bow  in  submission  and  meekness — quickened 
with  Divine  Love  ready  to  continue  your  journey 
of  ascension. 


107 


Here  we  have  for  consideration  Four  very  im- 
portant features.  This  is  the  First  Zone  in  which 
we  find  the  children.  Second  it  is  a  Great  Musical 
belt  where  many  compositions  are  written.  Where 
every  Soul  learns  that  he  vibrates  with  a  certain 
key  in  the  Musical  scale — that  certain  rates  of 
vibrations  have  already  been  unfolded  from  within. 
He  learns  to  know  his  real  place  in  Nature — to 
what  he  is  attuned  and  why  he  is  so  attuned  and 
how  to  attune  himself  to  still  higher  rates  of 
Vibration.  This  in  itself  is  a  most  Marvelous 
Revelation.  He  sees  the  Vibrations  with  its  colors 
and  analyzes  their  chemical  constituents.  Here  he 
sees  the  possibility  of  the  chemist  becoming  an 
alchemist — and  ere  he  leaves  this  wonderful  belt 
for  the  next  in  the  scale  of  ascension — he  will  have 
transmuted  many  of  the  grosser  elements  of  his 
own  nature  into  the  purer  qualities  or  higher 
vibrations. 

The  Third  important  point  is  the  Great  Tem- 
ple of  Healing  where  the  advanced  Souls  gather 
and  in  Unison  send  forth  their  Healing  Vibrations 
to  this  Earth  realm.  What  our  world  designates 
as  the  Noon  hour  on  this  Earth  realm  which  of 
course  varies  in  different  localities  at  the  time 
when  the  Sun  is  in  its  highest  meridian,  the  teach- 
ers and  Masters  of  this  sphere  and  from  the  high- 
er Zones  gather  here  to  concentrate  and  send  forth 
the  Healing  Vibrations.  If  you  will  relax  com- 
pletely at  this  time  sending  forth  your  prayer  and 
then  in  the  Silence  permit  the  Vibrations  to  flow 

108 


into  your  Being — you  will  find  most  wonderful 
help  not  only  physically,  but  otherwise.  You  will 
absorb  these  vibrations  consciously  or  uncon- 
sciously if  you  will  go  into  the  Silence  and  relax, 
and  if  you  persist  in  the  regularity  of  making  the 
conditions  you  will  by  and  by  consciously  perceive 
them  and  realize  their  wonderful  effects — or  mar- 
velous manifestations.  Of  course  the  more  you 
attune  yourself  to  these  Vibrations  the  quicker 
and  greater  are  the  results. 

Here  you  find  Temples  where  Spirits  are  healed. 
Many  cases  of  severe  suffering — caused  by  ex- 
trem  cruelty  or  severe  shocks  of  various  kinds 
which  have  shattered  the  Soul — or  cases  of  ex- 
treme sufferings  from  disappointments  or  trials 
and  heartaches — or  unjust  persecutions — all  of 
which  have  affected  the  Soul's  equilibrium.  Such 
are  very  tenderly  taken  care  of  and  the  healing 
balm  administered  in  this  Temple.  The  finite  mind 
could  not  comprehend  these  effects  on  the  Soul — 
however,  such  cases  are  overcome  here  in  this  Sa- 
cred Temple  of  Healing — so  that  the  Soul  can  go  on 
and  pick  up  the  thread  and  continue  its  progres- 
sion. These  treatments  are  such  that  the  Intelli- 
gence wholly  forgets  for  the  time  being  the  condi- 
tions which  so  shattered  their  equilibrium.  In 
speaking  of  Spirits  here  we  mean  the  Intelligence 
or  disembodied  individual. 

The  Fourth  most  wonderful  feature  is  the  Elec- 
trical Building,  which  is  a  school  where  they  are 
taught  how  to  use  Electricity — they  are  taught 


109 


how  to  equip  the  different  Zones  with  electric 
wires  which  they  use  as  a  commodity  for  trav- 
eling. They  travel  along  these  electric  wires  from 
place  to  place,  just  as  we  travel  in  our  street  cars 
or  railway  trains.  There  is  absolutely  nothing  on 
this  Earth  realm  analogous  to  their  batteries  and 
mode  of  traveling — therefore  to  the  undeveloped 
it  will  be  very  hard  to  perceive  the  many  ways 
in  which  they  use  these  electrical  currents  or 
wires. 

They  are  taught  here  how  to  assist  the  em- 
bodied Souls  on  this  earth  realm — not  only  how 
to  impart  knowledge  to  those  who  are  capable  of 
receiving  it  and  assimilating  it,  but  also  to  guide 
them  or  steer  them  aright.  Many  people  on  this 
earth  realm  get  these  strong  impressions  and  they 
call  them  "hunches,"  but  they  have  not  the  least 
conception  how  they  receive  them.  They  could 
not  even  realize  that  an  embodied  Soul  is  Never 
alone.  They  could  not  even  realize  the  possibility 
of  any  assistance  coming  from  an  unseen  Intelli- 
gence. There  is  a  class  of  people  who  are  so  super- 
stitious that  they  claim  it  is  dangerous,  but  these 
have  never  yet  found  a  way  of  overthrowing  God's 
Laws.  They  do  not  realize  that  each  is  dependent 
upon  the  other  and  that  All  Danger  lies  within 
themselves.  These  Intelligences  are  taught  how 
to  protect  us  and  how  to  aid  us  in  many  various 
ways — if  we  are  ready  for  assistance  and  if  we 
desire  to  be  uplifted.  It  is  through  our  desires 

110 


that  we  attract  these  Beneficent  Intelligences — 
those  who  know  and  understand  the  Law. 

When  we  go  into  the  Silence  for  prayer — for 
concentration  and  meditation  this  work  of  attach- 
ing electrical  cords  to  us  is  done — or  oftimes  while 
we  are  asleep — which  enables  those  who  come  to 
us  as  Teachers  and  Helpers  to  sense  our  every 
thought  our  every  need.  These  commodities  en- 
able them  to  more  conveniently  and  more  effect- 
ively be  of  assistance  to  us.  That  is  one  of  the 
secrets  that  causes  individuals  to  grow  very 
rapidly  and  be  more  successful.  They  are  also 
taught  how  to  build  a  protecting  influence  around 
us — by  disintegrating,  harmful,  destructive  vibra- 
tions and  building  constructive,  helpful  vibrations 
around  us  so  that  you  are  more  capable  of  attract- 
ing to  yourself  the  better,  higher  things  of  life, 
which  are  more  conducive  for  Soul  unfoldment  and 
progression.  As  the  helpful  better  things  of  life 
can  only  be  accomplished  through  the  Right 
Vibrations. 

On  this  Earth  realm  when  we  talk  through  the 
receiver  of  the  telephone  the  vibration  travels 
along  the  wires,  reaching  the  one  at  the  other  end 
of  the  line — so  in  thought  transference  the  vibra- 
tion travels  along  the  electric  wires  of  the  human 
system,  which  are  the  nerve  currents — to  the 
Brain  which  is  the  Central  Station  or  the  receiver. 
Whether  the  thought  is  sent  out  from  the  disem- 
bodied Souls  in  these  Zones  or  from  those  in  the 
body  on  this  earth  realm — if  you  are  in  tune  with 


111 


that  vibration  you  receive  it  as  distinctly  as  you 
do  the  sound  over  the  telephone.  The  modus 
operandi  of  communicating  with  Souls  in  either 
realm  of  life  is  thought  transference — sympathy 
is  the  link  that  connects  mind  with  mind.  Thought 
is  a  vibration — every  vibration  has  its  chemical 
constituents  and  its  color — its  rate  of  vibration 
which  designates  its  quality.  Again  All  our 
thoughts,  our  feelings,  our  actions  and  our  deeds 
are  registered  in  the  Soul — and  these  vibrations 
are  the  fabric  which  forms  the  garment  of  the 
Spirit.  Each  Spirit  emits  a  Light  more  or  less 
intense  and  every  Spirit  is  conscious  of  an  aural 
atmosphere  emanating  from  itself.  The  advanced 
Souls  can  readily  -read  every  secret  act  of  the 
lower.  The  aural  brightness  of  the  higher  hides 
the  state  of  the  Soul — while  those  who  are  exist- 
ing in  the  same  vibration  are  not  conscious  of 
each  other's  lives  so  they  can  reveal  to  each  other 
the  secrets  of  their  life  if  they  choose,  or  keep 
their  secrets  to  themselves.  In  the  lower  Zones 
the  conditions  of  the  Soul  stand  out  clear  and  dis- 
tinct— and  is  easily  read — or  disciphered. 

As  we  ascend  higher  we  find  improved  means  of 
communicating  and  imparting  ideas  and  register- 
ing them.  Their  batteries  of  thought  connect  with 
kindred  thoughts  in  other  homes — and  in  this 
manner  they  absorb  knowledge  from  the  Intelli- 
gences in  the  still  higher  Zones.  In  this  belt  are 
found  many  Temples  of  Learning  where  the  Souls 
congregate  for  instructions  and  listen  to  the  flow 

112 


of  Wisdom  from  these  highly  evolved  Intelligences. 
Masters  and  Apostles  descend  to  this  belt  and  on 
such  occasions  the  dwellers  flock  by  the  thousands 
to  learn  from  their  Wisdom  and  feel  their  Divine 
presence. 

Every  Zone  has  its  Rulers  and  its  Teachers — 
and  Masters — each  having  their  duties.  The 
activity  as  you  see  from  the  foregoing  is  quite 
different  from  that  of  the  Second  and  Third  Zones. 
Here  we  are  gathering  knowledge  assimilating 
same  and  demonstrating  to  the  degree  that  we 
have  accumulated  knowledge  and  experiences 
through  our  present  state  of  unfoldment. 

In  the  Temples  of  Learning  they  teach  many 
things  pertaining  to  life — its  purpose — the  innate 
possibilities  of  the  Soul. — The  constructon  of  the 
Universe  and  its  relationship  to  man. — Man's  Spir- 
itual unfoldment  and  how  to  use  the  Power  of 
Spirit  to  make  it  most  effectual  among  men.  There 
are  many  apartments  where  the  different  topics 
are  discussed  by  the  different  teachers.  Spiritual 
Analogy  is  one  of  the  important  topics  in  this  and 
the  higher  Zones — and  receives  much  consider- 
ation. 

In  their  House  of  Justice  they  assemble  to  hold 
conference  pertaining  to  various  problems  regard- 
ign  this  Zone  and  the  general  events  and  happen- 
ings of  this  Earth  realm  and  means  and  ways  to 
uplift  this  crude  world  are  always  discussed  for 
the  betterment  of  human  affairs  and  conditions  in 
the  spirit  of  democracy,  that  justice,  righteous- 

113 


ness  and  the  Brotherhood  of  Man  may  be  brought 
about. 

All  reforms  are  first  promulgated  and  estab- 
lished in  the  World  of  Soul.  Here  in  this  Fourth 
Zone  many  are  started  then  taken  to  the  Fifth 
Zone,  then  to  the  very  highest  Center,  where  the 
final  decision  is  perfected  if  agreed  upon  by  the 
Holy  of  Holies.  Then  the  work  is  carried  out  by 
those  Intelligences  who  are  capable  of  handling 
the  problem.  If  you  could  project  your  conscious- 
ness beyond  the  realm  or  boundary  line  of  the 
physical  senses  you  could  see  how  many  problems 
are  being  worked  out  by  the  Unseen  Intelligences 
in  the  world  of  Soul. 

There  are  many  Temples  with  their  Halls  for 
Lectures  on  various  subjects — given  by  various 
individuals  and  these  halls  have  their  platform 
and  on  this  platform  many  distinguished  person- 
ages are  seen. 

There  is  a  registration  room  where  you  are  reg- 
istered by  the  teachers — your  state  of  progres- 
sion, your  soul  unfoldment — and  this  is  passed  on 
to  the  next  Zone  where  it  will  appear  before  the 
teachers  of  that  Zone. 

One  apartment  in  the  Temple  of  Learning  is  de- 
voted to  the  educations  of  the  foreign  Spirits.  No 
distinction  is  made.  All  regardless  of  nationality 
are  carefully  educated  and  all  have  the  same  ad- 
vantages— all  must  travel  the  same  ruote  through 
the  Soul  world  of  this  planet. 

In  the  lower  Zones  all  were  carefully  assisted 


114 


and  guided  by  the  teacher.  Here  you  must  recog- 
nize the  power  within  your  own  Soul  and  put  it 
into  practice — thus  building  afoundation  for  your- 
self which  will  enable  you  to  master  all  obstacles 
instead  of  being  controlled  by  them. 

At  this  elevation  they  are  not  subjected  to  the 
noise  and  commotion  of  this  planet  or  neighboring 
planet,  hence  they  do  not  need  the  shelter  and 
protection  of  their  houses.  So  regardless  of  these 
beautiful  structures  whose  foundations  are  inlaid 
with  jewels  and  gems  and  whose  spacious  apart- 
ments are  furnished  so  beautifully  and  so  com- 
plete— they  use  them  very  little — living  out  doors 
with  nature  most  of  the  time.  These  homes  are 
of  stone  and  some  few  of  wood.  All  here  have 
their  spacious  Music  room — a  room  for  Concentra- 
tion and  Soul  communion. 

Here  the  trees — perenials — shrubbery — vines — 
ferns  and  flowers  are  of  different  varieties — among 
them  are  seen  the  beautiful  Ivy  geranium — glad- 
iolas — carnations — hibiscus  rosea — tulips  —  tree 
peony  coreoptus  —  German  lilacs  —  roses —  glox- 
inia— orchis  spectabilis — and  many  other  beauti- 
ful flowers. 

Here  we  find  no  animals.  Many  charming  won- 
derful birds  are  seen  and  heard  in  this  great  belt. 

The  Moon  is  between  the  Third  and  Fourth 
Zones — so  here  we  are  next  to  the  Moon  and  its 
chemical  conditions.  The  Moon  being  electric  its 
effects  are  much  milder  on  the  dwellers  of  this 
Zone.  As  we  gravitate  to  this  belt  we  find  our- 

115 


selves  three  hundred  thousand  miles  from  this 
earth  realm,  which  was  at  one  time  our  home  or 
abiding  place. 

Again,  after  traveling  back  in  Mind  to  the  dark 
dense  belt  we  call  the  First  Zone  —  and  out  of  this 
darkness  into  the  dawn  of  the  Second  belt  —  then 
from  the  dawn  into  the  Light  of  our  day  into  the 
Third  and  then  find  ourselves  among  the  beauties 
and  glories  of  this  Fourth  Zone,  where  we  are 
surrounded  in  a  light  of  pale  yellow  that  alone  is 
an  inspiration  and  a  sensation  that  the  finite  mind 
functioning  amid  the  gross  vibrations  of  this 
earth  realm  in  a  gross  physical  body  cannot 
fathom  because  it  cannot  realize  the  great  differ- 
ence in  the  rate  of  vibration  to  which  we  are  now 
attuned. 

In  this  earth  realm  many  are  assuming  the  posi- 
tive attitudes  of  mind,  thinking  they  are  growing 
in  power.  They  do  not  understand  that  the  Power 
lies  within  the  Spirit  and  not  in  the  Mind.  The 
Mind  must  be  brought  under  subjection  of  the 
Spirit  or  Ego  wherein  lie  the  possibilities  and  po- 
tentialities of  our  Being.  As  you  control  your 
Mind  through  the  right  thinking  you  gradually 
purify  the  atmosphere  of  your  Soul  and  kindle  the 
Light  within  through  thoughts  of  kindness  and 
Unselfish  service  and  good  will  to  your  fellow  man. 

To  the  extent  that  you  have  accomplished  this 
will  be  the  degree  of  your  enfoldment.  We  must 
first  awaken  through  the  right  thinking  ere  the 
Light  of  the  Ego  or  SP^it  becomes  kindled  into  a 


116 


burning  flame — for  it  has  been  dormant  and 
veiled  with  dense  gross  material  vibrations.  So 
when  this  garment  of  your  soul  is  saturated  with 
passion — lust — greed  —  jealousy  —  deceit  —  hy- 
pocrisy— malice — revenge  and  selfishness,  which 
we  might  say  is  the  worst  of  all,  as  it  is  a  combi- 
nation of  the  other  elements  and  is  the  binding 
force — how  can  the  Light  of  your  Soul  shine  when 
your  consciousness  is  dimmed  with  these  reflec- 
tions, which  all  come  through  the  mind  reaching 
out  through  the  physical  senses  causing  that  in- 
tense feeling  of  Egotism. 

As  you  change  your  thoughts  from  destructive 
dense  vibrations  into  constructive  higher  vibra- 
tions your  garment  assumes  a  different  hue — a 
different  quality  of  finer  vibrations  and  at  the 
same  time  the  dim  light  is  being  kindled  into  a 
burning  flame — and  as  you  reach  out  away  from 
selfish  desires  your  consciousness  will  expand  and 
the  Light  grow  brighter.  Now  as  you  have 
reached  the  heights  of  this  Fourth  Zone  you  are 
becoming  illumined,  radiating  a  more  powerful, 
much  brighter  Light,  and  after  advancing  through 
the  seven  gradations  of  this  Zone  you  will  have 
accomplished  your  efforts  to  overcome  the  desires 
of  the  mind  for  Self.  You  will  have  subdued  the 
intense  selfishness — egotism — hatred — jealousy — 
unjust  criticism  and  prejudices  and  have  trans- 
muted these  elements  into  tolerance — charity — 
sympathy  and  Loving  Service. 

All  of  this  must  be  accomplished  in  this  Zone 

117 


ere  you  can  radiate  an  atmosphere  of  Divine  Love 
for  all  humanity.  Indeed  you  are  here  awakened 
to  the  fact  that  all  our  mistakes,  delusions  and 
errors  and  egotism  caused  by  the  blind  impulses 
of  the  Mind  must  be  wholly  outgrown  or  overcome 
and  our  Aura  must  become  cleansed  ere  we  can 
vibrate  with  the  heavenly  conditions  in  the  next 
Zone  which  awaits  us. 

Here  we  can  see  that  all  the  petty  details  of  our 
life  reveal  a  Divine  purpose  and  that  within  the 
Center  of  our  Being  lies  the  Power  to  overcome 
and  conquer  Self — the  power  to  harmonize  all 
warring  elements  which  dissipate  our  energy  and 
the  power  to  unify  our  impulses  and  desires  with 
the  Divine  purpose — that  our  thoughts  and  deeds 
may  unite  with  the  internal  harmony  and  find  their 
completion  in  Service  and  Divine  Love. 

So  here  we  begin  to  practice  Self  Restraint — 
we  must  attain  the  power  and  absolute  control  and 
become  Master  over  Self.  So  all  fear — all  Selfish- 
ness— egotism — hatred  and  jealousy  must  be- 
come transmuted  into  Courage — Kindness — Toler- 
ance— sympathy  and  Service — that  we  may  have 
the  Power  to  render  service  through  love  for  all 
mankind  regardless  of  race  or  color — in  both 
worlds. 

We  are  unhappy,  discontented  and  in  misery 
because  we  allow  ourselves  to  become  creatures  of 
Self-Selfishness.  The  Self,  which  is  the  creation 
of  the  physical  sensations,  reflects  no  light.  Sel- 
fishness creates  a  vibration  which  contracts  the 


118 


power  of  Spirit.  When  we  practice  selfishness  we 
become  narrow — shrivel  up — we  become  unyield- 
ing— stubborn  and  are  blind  to  the  Infinite  Spirit 
that  is  all  around  us  and  within  us.  A  selfish  in- 
dividual is  always  loud  with  its  own  clamour  and 
creates  a  boundary  wall  which  imprisons  the  Soul, 
shutting  out  the  ever-flowing,  unlimited  currents 
Vibrant  with  Divine  Life  that  flow  from  the  world 
of  Soul  or  God's  Divine  Kingdoms.  Neither  can 
the  Light  of  your  own  Soul  radiate  its  power  until 
you  break  the  bonds  of  Self  and  expand  your  con- 
sciousness into  the  Universal. 

We  cannot  raise  ourselves  above  certain  vibra- 
tions until  we  reach  out  beyond  Selfish  desires 
and  recognize  our  at-one-ment  with  the  Universal 
Spirit — rendering  unselfish  service  when  and 
wherever  we  can.  The  End  of  Self  begins  when 
we  seek  to  serve  God  through  Divine  Love  which 
is  Universal. 

The  only  way  you  can  serve  God  is  by  serving 
Man.  Whatever  you  do  unto  the  least  of  His  crea- 
tures you  do  unto  Him  and  this  is  serving  God. 
Faith  without  work  brings  no  results.  Here  the 
Soul  cries  out:  Thou  Infinite  Divine  Source  of  all 
Light  and  Life,  reveal  Thyself  in  me. — This  is  the 
Beginning  of  learning  to  know  Self  and  how  to 
conquer  Self.  We  must  become  Self  reliant — 
stand  upon  our  merits  and  manifest  this  poise 
through  our  works — through  serving  humanity — 
evolving  the  power  within — gathering  and  assim- 
ilating knowledge  through  our  experiences  and 

119 


stand  the  test  through  the  various  obstacles  that 
confront  us.  There  is  no  way  of  covering  up  or 
hiding  your  degree  of  unfoldment — all  stand  face 
to  face  with  facts.  You  not  only  serve  those  in 
the  world  of  Soul,  but  those  who  are  still  strug- 
gling blindly  through  their  physical  bodies  drift- 
ing with  the  tide  and  thus  being  servants  instead 
of  masters  over  their  condition  and  environment. 
Here  we  learn  the  fact  that  we  are  Creators  and 
that  we  have  created  our  own  environments — our 
own  conditions  unconsciously.  Now  you  are 
taught  how  you  can  consciously  create  that  which 
you  will — and  how  you  can  become  Master  over  the 
Vibrations  you  have  created  that  have  been  such 
obstacles.  How  to  control  the  elements  of  nature 
instead  of  being  swayed  by  them.  Not  only  this, 
but  you  must  learn  to  control  the  vibratory  waves 
that  you  contact  with  in  coming  back  to  this  earth 
realm  through  the  lower  belts. 

As  the  Soul  becomes  more  ethereal  these  lower 
vibrations  have  their  effect.  It  is  to  them  like 
going  into  a  damp,  musty  cellar — So  here  they 
are  taught  how  to  robe  themselves  before  wan- 
dering out  into  these  vibrations.  On  this  earth 
plane  we  clothe  our  physical  bodies  to  protect  them 
from  the  cold,  dampness  and  other  conditions, 
and  similarly  they  must  do  here — protect  them- 
selves from  the  atmospheric  curents  ,fogs  and 
disturbances.  So  they  are  taught  how  to  master 
these  conditions. 

In  this  degree  of  unfoldment  they  are  capable 

120 


of  demonstrating  the  Power  of  Spirit  over  matter 
to  a  certain  extent.  They  can  manifest  certain 
degrees  of  life  out  of  the  unmanifested.  For 
instance  take  a  wooden  cane  and  turn  it  into  a 
living  reptile — or  cause  a  plant  to  bloom — or  a  seed 
to  grow  almost  at  Will. 

They  are  able  to  discipher  conditions  and  vibra- 
tory waves  as  seen  around  individuals  and  in  the 
Universal  Ether.  They  are  able  to  disintegrate 
destructive  vibrations  and  produce  constructive 
ones,  bringing  about  harmony  where  discord 
reigns  in  the  hearts  of  emjbodied  Souls.  They  are 
able  to  handle  the  elements  of  Nature — go  out 
into  rain  and  wind  storms  in  their  aeroplanes  and 
take  with  them  an  embodied  Soul  who  is  capable 
of  journeying  in  the  Soul  body.  They  control  their 
instrument — the  Soul  they  have  taken  in  charge 
through  the  power  of  thought.  Many  times  such 
experiences  are  so  deeply  impressed  upon  the 
mind  so  that  when  they  again  take  possession  of 
the  physical  body  they  will  relate  what  a  wonder- 
ful dream  they  have  had,  not  realizing  it  was  only 
one  of  the  natural  experiences  of  the  Soul. 

It  must  be  remembered  all  leave  the  physical 
body  in  sleep — but  the  majority  cling  so  close  to 
their  environments  or  friends  and  family,  being  so 
closely  bound  to  material  vibrations  or  material 
interests — their  consciousness  has  not  expanded 
— they  have  not  reached  out  into  the  Universal. 
The  light  of  their  Soul  has  not  been  kindled. 

They  wear  white  robes  in   their  Temples  of 

121 


learning  and  their  festivities  and  other  occasion^ 
but  for  sight-seeing — for  their  rambles  and  pleas- 
ures they  dress  to  suit  their  own  taste  in  their 
own  unique  fashion  in  the  colors  they  desire. 
Many  knee  trousers — swallow  tail  coats  and  san- 
dals are  worn  by  the  artists  or  the  distinguished 
characters.  The  ladies  wear  dainty  afternoon 
gowns  in  their  own  colors  or  suitable  dresses  for 
outings  and  rambles. 

In  the  Cathedral  the  Masters  place  before  you 
a  tray  of  jewels  and  gems  from  which  you  have  the 
privilege  of  selecting  your  choice.  This  is  taken 
by  the  teacher  to  the  Fifth  Zone  in  the  Temple 
of  Love  where  you  will  find  this  gem.  Every  stone, 
every  jewel  has  its  own  Vibration  and  the  Soul 
naturally  reaches  out  for  that  which  harmonizes 
with  its  own  vibratory  currents.  It  is  to  be  hoped 
that  you  will  choose  wisely  for  through  this  your 
life  is  read  and  you  will  be  placed  accordingly.  We 
pass  from  school  to  school — from  gradation  to 
gradation — getting  our  own  experiences.  Stand 
the  tests  and  trials  of  this  Zone  and  the  teachers 
are  the  judges  who  know  whether  you  are  qual- 
ified to  pass  on  and  are  eligible  for  the  next  step. 

This  is  the  first  Zone  in  which  you  must  stand 
on  your  own  merits  of  Self  reliance.  You  must 
become  Self  sufficient  and  demonstrate  the  Power 
of  Spirit. 

We  have  come  to  a  realization  that  we  are  an 
Epitone  of  Nature  and  that  Spirit  is  the  Electric 
Vibrator  and  Motor  of  the  Soul.  A  spark  from 

122 


the  Infinite  which  is  found  in  All  Nature — in  the 
plant — the  flower — the  animal  as  well  as  in  the 
Suns  and  planets. 

You  are  all  familiar  with  the  fact  that  Vibration 
or  motion  is  manifested  throughout  the  Universe — 
Everything  moves  vibrates  and  circles — nothing 
is  at  rest.  From  the  electrons  Ions  or  corpuscles 
which  compose  the  atom  to  the  planets  the  Suns 
as  well  as  in  Man.  Spirit  is  the  Electric  Vibrator 
or  Motor  in  Everything.  Matter  and  Spirit  are 
the  two  poles  of  the  same  Essence. 

The  difference  between  the  material  and  Ethe- 
real Worlds  is  in  Degree  of  Vibration. 

The  Difference  between  the  physical  body  and 
our  Soul  body  is  in  degrees  of  Vibration.  The  Dif- 
ference between  the  Lower  Zones  and  the  Higher 
Heavenly  Zones  is  in  degrees  of  Vibration.  The 
Difference  between  the  Soul  body  of  those  In- 
telligences who  inhabit  the  Lower  Zones  and  those 
who  dwell  in  the  Celestial  Heavens  is  in  quality 
of  substance  and  degrees  of  vibration.  Wtth  these 
facts  before  us  you  readily  perceive  that  there 
is  no  Spirit  without  Matter — rand  that  the  Sub- 
stance of  the  lower  Zones  is  a  denser  form  of 
Matter  in  a  lower  rate  of  Vibration.  The  Soul 
body  that  harmonizes  with  this  Zone  is  of  the  same 
dense  substance  and  of  the  same  low  vibration. 

Ether  is  matter  in  a  higher  rata  of  Vibration. 
As  we  ascend  each  Zone  represents  higher  rates 
of  Vibration  of  the  same  Etheric  Substance — 
hence  as  we  climb  the  ladder  of  life  we  enter  into 


123 


higher  and  higher  rates  of  Vibration  and  the  Soul 
of  these  intelligences  inhabiting  these  various 
Zones  always  harmonize  with  the  rate  of  Vibra- 
tion and  its  chemical  constituents.  Here  the 
dwellers  mingle  closely  with  Nature  where  they 
can  absorb  the  Aroma  of  the  Flowers — who  are  the 
Silent  Thinkers — the  Adorners — the  Life  itself. 
They  know  better  than  man  how  to  draw  to  them- 
selves and  how  to  absorb  the  chemical  conditions 
necessary  for  their  sustainance  and  unfoldment. 
While  Man  absorbs  from  them  as  well  as  from  the 
chemical  conditions  of  the  atmosphere. 

As  we  ascend  in  the  scale  of  life  from  the  Lower 
realms  to  the  Higher  Heavens  in  this  Ethereal 
world  our  Soul  body  becomes  more  and  more  por- 
ous and  more  Ethereal  vibrating  in  harmony  with 
each  Zone.  It  seems  as  if  Every  Pore  is  like  a 
mouth  which  absorbs  from  its  environments.  So 
here  the  Inteligences  subsist  through  the  spiritual 
Law  of  assimilation.  No  longer  is  food  a  neces- 
sity as  was  the  case  in  the  lower  zones.  Del- 
icious fruits  are  found  here  and  they  partake  of 
the  juices  if  they  desire. 

The  Fourth  important  point  for  consideration 
is  the  children.  Their  Souls  have  not  become 
contaminated  with  earth  vibrations  so  they  are 
attuned  to  the  lofty  atmosphere  of  the  Fourth 
Zone  and  this  is  the  first  Zone  that  is  sufficiently 
purified  for  these  precious  sacred  Souls  which  are 
brought  here  by  relatives  or  friends  and  here 
they  grow  to  maturity  and  are  educated  and 

124 


lovingly  taken  care  of.  Every  desire  that  is  best 
for  them  is  granted — they  are  carefully  watched 
and  studied  and  trained — giving  them  every  op- 
portunity to  develop  the  qualities  most  dominent 
in  their  nature.  Children  absorb  and  digest  know- 
ledge in  the  Soul  world  much  more  rapidly  than 
do  the  older  individuals — for  two  reasons.  First 
because  they  have  not  yet  enveloped  themselves 
with  the  gross  material  vibrations  of  this  earth 
realm.  Second  because  their  minds  have  not  been 
filled  with  the  mistakes,  the  errors  and  delusions 
taught  on  this  mundane  sphere — hence  they  do 
not  have  to  outgrow  such  impressions.  Their 
minds  are  pure  and  free  and  their  Soul  is  like  a 
sponge  ready  to  absorb  all  that  they  come  in  con- 
tact with. 

Wonderful  festivals  and  entertainments  are 
given  by  the  teachers  for  the  benefit  and  amuse- 
ment of  the  children.  They  have  their  various 
amusements  and  games.  One  of  the  beautiful 
numbers  of  their  festivities  is  what  we  here  would 
call  the  maypole  dance — to  see  these  little  tots 
with  their  gauzy  sweet  dresses  and  wreaths  of 
flowers  twining  in  and  out  in  various  rythmic 
movements  as  each  has  a  hold  of  its  own  colored 
ribbon  which  streams  from  the  center  of  the  pole 
is  a  most  charming  beautiful  sight.  Many  child- 
ren so  much  miss  their  parents  that  it  is  difficult 
at  first  to  sooth  and  pacify  and  satisfy  them. 
Many  times  the  teachers  in  whose  care  they  have 
been  placed  bring  them  back  here  to  the  parents 

125 


and  as  the  parents  are  not  cognizant  of  their  pres- 
ence their  grief  is  almost  uncontrollable  for  a  time 
as  they  cannot  understand  why  the  parents  do  not 
talk  to  them  or  recognize  them.  So  they  must 
be  carefully  treated  and  amused  in  various  ways — 
so  that  they  will  overcome  the  intense  desire  to 
hover  near  the  parents. 

You  will  find  a  most  beautiful  home  here  for 
the  children  where  they  are  taught  music — paint- 
ing and  natures  Laws  which  they  grasp  much 
more  readily  than  they  would  if  they  were  func- 
tioning in  their  physical  body.  They  are  taught 
the  Law  of  Vibration  through  the  flowers  which 
they  gather. 

They  are  taught  that  Every  Individual  responds 
to  a  certain  Keynote  in  the  scale  of  music — Vocal 
and  instrumental  music  which  is  in  harmony  with 
this  sphere  is  taught  to  these  little  ones. 

Many  times  when  they  have  their  festivities 
in  the  higher  Zones  the  children  are  permitted  to 
visit  these  with  their  teachers  and  indulge  in  the 
festivities.  They  are  taken  out  to  various  local- 
ities that  they  may  learn  of  the  beauties  of  nature. 
Their  inquiring  minds  reveal  their  state  of  growth 
and  degree  of  consciousness.  They  grow  so  very 
beautiful  in  the  world  of  Soul  and  always  retain 
that  youthful  appearance.  They  make  the  jour- 
ney through  this  world  of  Soul  in  much  shorter 
space  of  time  than  those  who  lived  out  their 
earthly  career. 

It  is  a  most  charming  sight  to  see  the  children 


126 


in  the  forests — in  the  parks  or  in  their  gardens — 
in  their  festivities  or  in  the  schools.  Carefuly 
they  are  educated  and  taken  care  of  as  they  are 
so  sacred  unto  God. 

There  are  beautiful  homes  here  for  the  little 
motherless  waifs  and  these  too  progress  very 
rapidly  and  grow  so  beautifully.  They  go  back  and 
forth  to  this  Earth  plane  to  get  experience  and 
knowledge  of  this  material  world. 

They  excell  in  music  and  in  their  entertainments 
which  the  teachers  arrange  for  them  they  are  pro- 
vided with  similar  advantages  as  the  children  on 
the  Earth  realm  that  through  these  they  will  have 
similar  earth  experiences.  They  are  taught  to 
take  active  parts  in  these  entertainments.  They 
become  Illumined  purified  Souls  of  wisdom  in  a 
short  space  of  time. 

In  their  attractive  parks  are  many  benches 
and  comfy  seats  and  cozy  charming  nooks  where 
families  and  friends  gather  or  sweethearts  meet. 
In  their  parks  and  cities  are  found  statuary  of  not- 
ed individuals.  In  the  center  of  their  parks  are 
seen  Fountains  surrounded  by  water  lilies  or  pond 
lilies — Bergonias  and  ferns  near  by  and  here  you 
are  charmed  by  the  sweet  songsters  and  many 
other  beautiful  birds. 

There  are  so  many  beautiful  mountains — cat- 
aracts— waterfalls — ravines — and  rivulets  and 
lakes  in  this  wonderful  Zone. 

One  of  the  most  charming  spots  is  the  wonder- 
ful mountains  from  whence  pour  in  graceful  rythm 


127 


the  Minnehaha  falls — a  most  beautiful  nook  known 
here  as  the  old  Indian  hunting  ground — this  was 
the  vision  and  the  dream  of  the  Indians'  Heaven. 
Here  you  will  see  the  little  canoe  on  the  rivers  and 
the  boats  on  their  lakes.  The  scenery  here  sur- 
passes that  of  the  third  Zone.  All  races,  all 
nationalities  are  children  of  the  One  Source  "Our 
Father ''  and  unto  Him  all  are  sacred  and  so  very 
important  and  essential  that  He  has  so  provided 
in  His  Unselfish  Divine  Plan  that  all  may  return 
through  the  same  route  and  progress  to  the  same 
heights  growing  nearer  and  nearer  like  unto  God — 
regardless  of  what  their  conceptions  of  heaven 
were  and  regardless  of  their  religious  beliefs — 
regardless  of  their  color  and  race. 

Here  you  will  find  an  apartment  in  their  Temple 
of  Learning  where  the  foreign  Spirits  are  educated 
and  many  of  these  have  had  a  better  conception 
of  Heaven  than  we  who  have  been  expecting  to 
find  God  sitting  on  a  throne  surrounded  by  His 
Angels  playing  on  the  Golden  Harps.  Many  gold- 
en Harps  are  seen  in  the  world  of  Soul  and  these 
Intelligences  know  how  to  manipulate  this  instru- 
ment so  perfectly  that  the  most  exquisite  strains 
of  music  may  be  heard. 

Beginning  with  the  Third  Zone  you  will  find 
as  you  travel  through  the  world  of  Soul  that  all 
is  centralized — harmonized  and  organized  in  such 
a  manner  that  all  share  the  same  priveledges — the 
same  advantages  the  same  blessings  regardless  of 
color  or  nationality.  The  lower  grades  and  lower 

128 


intelligencies  are  always  subservient  to  the  higher 
and  in  the  various  cycles  of  time  all  will  fill  the 
same  place  and  evolve  the  same  Powers.  Those 
who  are  administering  today  as  teachers  will  some 
time  be  Angels  or  Ruling  Angels  and  Messiahs  and 
so  on  up  the  scale.  While  those  who  are  being 
taught  today  will  some  time  be  the  teachers  and  on 
up  the  scale — while  those  who  are  serving  as  coun- 
cilors and  Rulers  have  already  served  in  their 
various  steps  of  ascension  some  time  in  some  cycle. 
Such  is  God's  Law.  No  exceptions,  no  partialities, 
no  respector  of  persons.  There  are  conditions  and 
places  provided  for  even  the  Unruly  until  they 
become  obedient  unto  God.  While  the  Dark  Souls 
must  some  time  awaken  and  see  the  Light  and 
progress  into  the  Divine  realms  and  dwell  hi  God's 
Holy  Divine  Kingdoms  and  be  participants  of  His 
Divine  Eternal  Light. 

When  you  were  ready  to  enter  this  Zone  you 
had  your  spiritual  bath  in  that  wonderful  Lake 
and  your  outer  garment  that  looked  like  black 
cobwebs  which  were  the  material  earthly  vibra- 
tions that  had  been  concentrated  around  you — 
which  obstructed  your  Soul  vision — sluf f ed  off — 
or  in  other  words  just  dropped  from  your  head  to 
the  ground.  Now  as  you  have  passed  through  all 
the  gradations  of  this  Fourth  Zone  and  are 
eligible  for  the  Fifth,  which  is  the  First  Holy 
Heavenly  Zone — ere  you  can  enter  here  you  must 
again  leave  your  outer  garment.  So  your  last 
mission  and  your  last  instructions  are  given  in 

129 


the  Holy  Temple  of  Purification — and  after  you 
have  come  out  of  here  the  material  garment  drops 
to  your  feet  and  again  you  can  step  out  and  away 
from  it  and  enter  into  the  First  Purified  Har- 
monious Holy  Heavenly  atmosphere  of  this  Great 
Heavenly  Zone  or  Center  taking  with  you  the  bles- 
sing of  Divine  Love  from  the  Masters  who  so 
lovingly  pointed  the  way.  Throughout  the  world 
of  Soul  a  deep  reverence  and  strong  attachment 
grows  between  the  teachers  and  the  aspirants 
which  quickens  into  Divine  Love  and  they  become 
inseparably  cemented  together. 

Thou  Messengers  of  Light  Sublime 
We  are  drinking  at  Thy  Holy  shrine. 
The  Sacred  Wisdom  from  Thy  lips  entwine 
In  rythmic  Lore  and  Truth  Divine 
Oh  lift  our  Souls  to  Heavenly  shores 
Where  blessings  flow  in  numbers  more 
Than  all  the  Kingdoms  here  below. 

Thou  Messengers  of  Light  Sublime 
Who  assist  us  in  our  earthly  climb 
The  scale  of  life  ascend  through  time 
From  all  Eternity  of  the  passed 
Through  Kingdoms  and  planes  at  last 
Have  reached  the  borders  of  Heavenly  shores 
Where  Love  Divine  reigns  forever  more. 

Thou  Messengers  of  Light  Sublime 
To  Thee  we  come  with  Love  Divine 


130 


With  reverential  greetings  bow 

In  Holiness  and  with  Sacred  Vow 

To  Thee  Oh  Master  our  love  shall  bind 

Throughout  Eternity  and  ever  climb 

The  heights  thou  hast  reached  through  time. 


131 


THE  FIFTH  ZONE 

THE  SCHOLARLY  BELT  IN  THE  ETHEREAL 
WORLD 

350,000  Miles  from  the  Earth  Realm. 

Oh  Fatherhood— Oh  Motherhood,  the  Divine 
Essence  of  All  Life  and  All  Light— Breathe  upon 
us  Thy  Spirit  Breathe — Illumine  us  with  Thy 
Light — Vivify  us  with  Thy  Life — Purify  us  with 
Thy  Love  and  Grant  that  in  All  we  think  and  say 
we  may  more  and  more  resemble  Thee. 

WE  HAVE  NOW  REACHED  THE  FIRST 
HEAVENLY  HOLY  ZONE  IN  THE  ETHEREAL 
WORLD— THE  WORLD  OF  THE  SOUL.  This 
Zone  is  fifty  thousand  miles  from  the  border  of 
the  Fourth  Zone  on  to  the  constellation  Orion. 
This  constellation  has  a  blue  Sun  and  the  reflected 
light  of  this  Sun  is  the  light  of  this  Zone,  which 
is  a  pale  blue.  Here  we  are  away  from  all  the 
commotion  and  noises  of  this  Earth  realm  and 


132 


quite  removed  from  that  of  the  neighboring 
planets. 

The  dwellers  wear  the  pale  purple  and  the  white 
robes  designating  their  degree  of  unf oldment  and 
intellectual  attainment.  These  robes  are  worn  in 
their  festivities  in  their  places  of  worship — in 
their  temples  of  learning — in  their  judicial  courts 
and  on  other  special  occasions.  For  ordinary  use 
Gentlemen  wear  the  customary  attire  that  we  see 
here  in  black  or  white  or  in  full  dress  as  the  occa- 
sion may  demand.  The  Ladies  are  seen  mostly  in 
their  white  dresses  for  ordinary  use  and  in  their 
gowns  of  soft  dainty  textures — like  our  chiffons  or 
laces,  with  their  gorgeous  jewels  of  diamonds, 
rubies,  sapphires  and  many  other  beautiful  jewels 
in  the  most  unique  designs — As  for  instance  a  bird 
stretched  across  the  bosom,  of  diamonds  inlaid 
with  rubies  bringing  out  the  design.  Arm  brace- 
lets— rings  and  hair  ornaments  are  seen  on  these 
Intelligences  whose  faces  radiate  the  bloom  of 
Youth,  and  whose  Wisdom  illumines  the  counte- 
nance that  its  radiation  is  not  only  seen,  but  felt, 
by  all  who  contact  with  these  heavenly  Souls.  All 
are  very  fastidious  in  their  attire,  which  must 
harmonize  with  the  Vibrations  of  this  heavenly 
Zone  and  be  in  keeping  with  the  demand  of  the 
occasion. 

The  Traveller  now  breathes  a  sigh  of  relief—- 
he  has  been  cleansed  from  all  animal  tendencies 
and  desires.  He  is  now  eligible  and  fit  to  abide  in 
the  First  Heavenly  Holy  Zone  of  God's  Kingdom 

133 


where  Harmony,  Peace  and  Love  reign  in  every 
heart  and  harmonize  with  the  atmosphere  in  this 
belt.  None  can  enter  here  until  all  selfishness  has 
been  overcome  and  their  consciousness  has  ex- 
panded, reaching  out  into  the  Universal  to  their 
degree  of  unf oldment — all  discord — all  hatred — all 
jealousy  and  all  the  animal  tendencies  that  the 
human  family  is  heir  to  have  been  wholly  trans- 
muted and  regenerated  into  Divine  Love  and  sym- 
pathy for  all  humanity.  Sympathy  is  Divine  Love 
put  in  action. 

When  we  have  entered  into  the  Fifth  Zone  we 
have  reached  a  great  step  on  our  journey  in  our 
ascension  and  have  accomplished  many  things  to 
our  satisfaction.  Here  the  Soul  has  not  only 
reached  a  higher  degree  of  Consciousness,  but  its 
light  radiates  sufficient  power  to  transmute  all 
ignorance  and  egotism  into  knowledge  and  Divine 
Love. 

The  Five  Leaf  Clover  is  symbolic  of  the  many 
advantages  for  the  scholarly  pursuits  in  these  con- 
ducive environments  and  the  realization  of  the 
blessings  and  joy  through  its  accumulations. 

From  an  Intellectual  standpoint  this  is  One  of 
the  most  interesting  of  all  the  Zones  of  the  Ethe- 
real World  to  the  finite  Mind  still  encased  in  a  phy- 
ical  structure  on  this  earth  realm.  We  have  here 
two  most  important  points  for  consideration.  On 
this  earth  plane  all  our  efforts  are  towards  the 
accomplishment  of  everything  For  Self.  Self 
praise — Self  laudation — Self  righteousness — Self 

134 


success  and  prosperity — all  for  Self.  But  here  in 
the  world  of  Soul  we  must  wholly  Overcome  Self 
and  all  our  efforts  must  be  devoted  for  the  accom- 
plishment of  Good  for  the  sake  of  Good  for  the 
uplift  of  all  humanity.  Every  desire  for  Self  must 
be  conquered.  The  greatest  Victory  of  the  Soul  is 
the  victory  over  Self. 

Here  in  this  Zone  the  conquest  of  Self  to  a  cer- 
tain degree  must  be  accomplished  ere  they  pass 
on  to  the  Sixth  Zone.  Our  responsibility  in  exe- 
cuting our  Powers  of  Self  reliance  began  in  the 
Fourth  Zone  and  here  we  must  become  Master  to 
a  much  greater  degree  over  all  trials  and  experi- 
ences working  out  our  Salvation  and  rendering 
unselfish  service  to  others  in  both  realms  of  Life. 
The  higher  always  ministering  to  the  lower  is 
God's  Law.  The  interaction  of  the  two  worlds  is 
one  of  the  Natural  events  of  life. 

The  two  great  points  for  consideration  are  the 
overcoming  or  conquest  over  Self  and  the  ability 
to  absorb  and  digest  the  knowledge  and  Wisdom 
that  lies  before  us.  For  this  is  indeed  a  great  Cen- 
ter of  Knowledge  and  Wisdom.  Knowledge  along 
every  line  has  reached  a  high  degree  of  perfection 
and  at  your  disposal  are  the  many  Libraries  witn 
their  volumes  upon  volumes  of  information  along 
every  branch  of  Science — Literature — Art — Mu- 
sic— Metaphysics — Philosophy.  You  will  find 
here  some  of  the  Great  Chemists — Astronomers — 
Metaphysicians — Poets — Musicians — Artists.  The 
use  of  wireless  and  electricity  have  reached  a  high 


135 


degree  of  perfection  anil  is  demonstrated  in  this 
Zone. 

The  Soul  in  its  present  degree  of  unfoldment 
having  been  cleansed  of  all  earthly  vibrations  is 
now  in  condition  to  absorb  and  digest  the  knowl- 
edge that  lies  before  it. 

In  these  Libraries  you  will  find  the  Original 
Literature  of  all  the  Ancient  Scriptures,  the 
Vedas — Our  Bible — the  sayings  of  Jesus  of  Naz- 
areth our  "Christ" — The  correct  copies  of  which 
we  have  never  had — much  having  been  omitted 
and  much  misinterpreted.  Also  the  writings 
which  were  destroyed  in  the  days  of  the  Reforma- 
tion at  the  Alexandrian  Library.  We  find  the 
works  of  Confucius  —  Euclid  —  Democrities  — 
Ptolemy — Empedicles — Pythagoras — Socrates  — 
Plato  and  many,  many  others. 

Here  you  will  find  the  history  of  this  planet  with 
all  its  many  convulsions  and  changes — the  many 
continents  that  once  were  and  are  no  more — the 
principal  one  of  these  is  the  one  known  to  us  as 
the  Great  Atlantis,  where  now  rolls  the  mighty 
waves  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  The  downfall  of  this 
continent  was  witnessed  by  many  Intelligences 
who  once  functioned  in  a  physical  structure  upon 
this  earth  realm  at  that  time. 

The  dwellers  upon  that  wonderful  continent  had 
progressed  far  beyond  the  range  of  consciousness 
which  the  highest  and  best  of  us  now  enjoy.  They 
were  so  highly  evolved  that  they  consciously  re- 
ceived their  wisdom  from  a  still  higher  Source — 

136 


God's  Divine  Kingdom.  The  Egyptians,  who 
ranged  next  in  Evolution,  kept  the  records  of  the 
Earth  for  many  thousand  years,  traces  of  which 
are  still  visible  in  the  Pyramids  of  Egypt.  They 
borrowed  some  of  their  Truths  from  the  Atlan- 
tians.  Egypt  was  one  of  the  strongholds  of  this 
Continent  of  the  Atlantis,  who  ruled  here  for  many 
hundred  thousand  years  (about  450,000).  Some 
time  we,  too,  will  reach  the  Intellectual  develop- 
ment and  Soul  unfoldment  which  they  had  attained 
and  still  greater  heights  which  await  us.  Many  of 
the  advanced  Souls  have  travelled  out  into  dis- 
tant realms  to  gather  knowledge  of  other  planets 
and  other  Solar  systems.  They  make  explorations 
of  our  Moon  and  the  Sun  and  return  laden  with 
knowledge  and  information.  All  of  these  trips 
have  been  planned  by  the  Masters  who  select 
groups  of  Intelligences  to  take  these  journeys, 
then  prepare  the  way.  These  are  carefully 
watched — noted  and  written  up  then  placed  in 
these  libraries  for  the  benefit  of  All. 

About  fifteen  years  ago  a  Group  of  twelve  highly 
evolved  Intelligences  from  the  Sixth  and  Seventh 
Zones  and  the  First  Celestial  Kingdom  started  on 
a  journey  around  our  Solar  System,  making  a 
visit  and  a  thorough  investigation  of  all  the  plan- 
ets within  the  radius  of  what  we  call  our  Solar 
System.  They  were  gone  about  nine  weeks. 
During  this  trip  they  gathered  much  information 
from  the  inhabitants  of  other  planets — visiting 
every  planet,  taking  cognizance  of  their  mode  of 

137 


living — their  environments  and  much  other  in- 
formation regarding  these  planets.  All  of  which 
has  been  recorded  and  placed  in  these  libraries. 

On  the  outer  edge  of  our  Solar  system  lies  a 
planet  which  has  not  yet  been  observed  or  discov- 
ered by  our  astronomers.  All  such  knowledge  is 
handed  down  to  the  inhabitants  of  this  earth  realm 
— to  those  who  are  ready  for  it  and  can  properly 
impart  it  to  the  world. 

If  you  could  see  the  interest  that  prevails 
throughout  this  Zone  not  only  of  the  worlds  that 
are  but  of  the  worlds  that  are  yet  to  be — it  would 
so  fill  your  Mind  with  enthusiasm  and  create  such 
an  intense  desire  to  know — that  you  would  place 
yourself  in  position  to  receive  and  indulge  in  this 
feast  of  Wisdom  that  is  yours  for  the  asking  if 
you  are  ready  to  digest  it.  Oh  how  much  time  we 
waste  in  the  petty  things  of  this  life  and  shut  out 
all  the  opportunities  of  mingling  with  the  enlight- 
ened Souls  of  this  Zone  and  the  still  higher  Intel- 
ligences who  are  so  filled  with  Knowledge  and  wis- 
dom who  would  and  could  give  us  so  much  correct 
information  that  would  wipe  out  all  errors  and 
the  conglomerated  ideas  which  are  given  out  as 
Truths  by  the  undeveloped  Souls  who  have  not  yet 
unfolded  the  higher  perceptions  and  are  not  in 
position  to  know  the  difference  between  that  which 
is  a  fact  and  that  which  is  the  outcome  of  individ- 
ualized ideas  or  beliefs. 

In  the  world  of  Soul  we  abide  by  Nature's  Laws 
which  are  God's  Laws.  If  we  would  fill  our  Minds 


138 


with  the  facts  as  they  flow  from  the  higher 
realms  it  would  cause  us  to  more  rapidly  develop 
and  become  purer  and  thus  in  radiating  such  lofty 
ideas  and  facts  they  would  so  permeate  this  earth 
realm  that  its  influence  would  wipe  out  all  pre- 
judices— superstition — egotism  and  selfishness 
and  the  Kingdom  of  God  would  reign  in  the  hearts 
of  men  here  on  earth  as  well  as  in  this  heavenly 
Zone.  But  we  are  so  blind  and  shut  out  the  Light 
that  radiates  from  the  world  of  Soul  through  our 
fears,  predjudices  and  superstition. 

So  long  as  we  are  not  aquainted  with  the  world 
of  Soul  and  do  not  know  of  the  many  Mansion 
in  our  Father's  House,  how  could  we  realize 
that  there  are  Beings  so  high  in  the  scale  of  Life 
who  have  the  Power  to  guide  and  direct  the  birth 
of  a  new  born  planet  or  regulate  the  affairs  of 
men  through  their  wisdom  always  complying  with 
the  evolutionary  scheme  of  God. 

Emerson  told  us  that  it  is  a  long  journey  from 
the  oyster  to  man,  but  the  journey  has  been  made. 
Let  me  remind  you  that  it  is  a  longer  journey  from 
the  Savage  known  as  Man  to  a  Civilized  Man  and 
then  to  a  Christ  but  that  journey  too  has  been 
made — and  still  higher  Beings  are  found  in  God's 
Divine  Kingdom. 

Many  do  not  know  what  constitutes  a  Christ 
and  when  we  speak  of  Jesus  of  Nazareth  they 
dispute  the  fact  that  such  an  Inteligence  ever 
existed  in  a  physical  form.  They  declare  that  all 
we  know  is  only  a  symbol  of  the  Christ  principle 

139 


within  us.  While  the  Christ  principle  dwells  with- 
in each  of  us — nevertheless  Jesus  of  Nazareth 
"Our  Christ"  dwelt  upon  this  earth  in  a  physical 
body  and  as  we  ascend  to  the  higher  Zones  into 
the  Celestial  we  will  reveal  the  facts  of  His  exis- 
tence there  in  that  Divine  Kingdom. 

After  we  have  reached  the  seventh  Zone  there 
you  will  have  the  power  to  Look  Back  into  the 
Book  of  Your  Life  and  see  the  many  steps  which 
you  have  ascended  and  turning  your  face  upward 
you  will  see  the  many  stairs  that  still  lie  before 
you  which  you  have  yet  to  climb.  These  reach 
out  into  realms  too  numerous  for  the  finite  mind 
in  its  present  degree  of  Consciousness  to  grasp 
or  comprehend. 

In  One  of  these  numerous  Libraries  in  this 
Zone  you  will  find  the  book  of  Your  Life  whose 
pages  you  will  have  the  privelege  of  perusing.  No 
doubt  with  many  of  us  we  will  find  more  on  the 
debit  side  of  the  ledger  than  on  the  credit  pages — 
but  whatever  our  mistakes  have  been  we  have 
eternity  before  us  to  fill  in  and  balance  the  ac- 
count. However  every  wrong  must  be  balanced  by 
that  which  is  right  through  unselfish  service 
through  Divine  Love. 

Your  Life  is  not  only  registered  from  the  time  of 
your  birth  in  this  physical  body  but  from  the  time 
of  your  leaving  your  heavenly  abode — theFount- 
ain  of  Bliss  to  your  birth  and  from  the  birth  of 
your  physical  body  through  this  life  and  then  your 
journey  through  the  world  of  Soul. 

140 


As  soon  as  you  start  your  Soul  progression 
whether  it  is  while  you  are  still  functioning  in 
the  physical  body  or  after  you  leave  the  physical 
body  and  gravitate  to  the  Soul  realm  the  same  is 
registered  in  the  world  of  Soul  in  every  Zone  be- 
ginning with  the  Third  Zone  as  this  is  the  first 
Zone  of  Light.  The  Light  of  the  Second  belt 
being  like  our  twilight. 

As  you  function  in  the  Fifth  Zone  it  seems  as  if 
you  are  in  a  world  of  Wisdom  where  you  can  fill 
your  Soul  to  overflowing  with  any  information 
along  any  line  you  may  desire.  Here  you  have 
the  privelege  and  pleasure  of  mingling  with  gen- 
uine Masters  of  Art  and  Music — Masters  of  Chem- 
istry and  Electricity — Masters  of  Astronomy  and 
Philosophy.  Some  of  the  finest  Poets — and 
writers  are  found  here  and  from  a  purely  un- 
selfish desire  for  the  Uplift  of  Humanity  they 
seek  avenues  where  they  can  impart  their  know- 
ledge. If  we  are  attuned  to  their  Vibration  we 
can  receive  much  that  will  benefit  us  and  this 
world. 

Wireless  communications  can  reach  us  from  the 
world  of  Soul  just  as  distinctly  and  conveniently  as 
the  messages  we  receive  over  the  telephone.  You 
are  the  receiver  and  if  you  are  attuned  to  the 
Sender  or  operator  you  can  at  any  time  receive 
your  message.  In  fact  our  inspiration  comes  in 
this  manner,  but  we  who  have  not  the  Soul  senses 


141 


evolved  are  not  conscious  of  it.  I  will  explain  this 
in  another  book  which  will  soon  be  in  print  on  the 
Laws  of  Progression. 

You  will  find  many  telegraphic  stations — wire- 
less and  otherwise  here  in  this  Zone.  Some  of 
them  having  been  erected  expressly  for  reaching 
the  children  of  Earth  and  others  for  the  purpose 
of  communicating  with  Souls  in  other  parts  of  the 
realm  of  Soul  and  some  are  wholly  for  experiment- 
al stations  while  others  are  for  private  use  to 
keep  in  touch  with  the  doings  of  this  Zone  and 
other  Zones.  Private  stations  are  also  found  in 
the  lower  Zones. 

There  are  a  few  private  Libraries  which  con- 
tain records  of  various  kinds — but  you  have  access 
to  so  many  Libraries  and  much  more  than  you 
can  digest  in  One  Life  is  at  your  command  and 
pleasure. 

Though  you  may  never  be  an  astronomer — a 
philosopher  or  chemist  yet  in  this  present  degree 
of  unfoldment  your  desire  to  know  is  unsquelch- 
able  for  you  have  distinct  glimpses  and  realiza- 
tions that  you  are  an  Epitome  of  Nature  and  as 
such  you  see  within  yourself  the  same  Essence 
and  power  that  constitutes  the  Suns — the  stars 
and  the  planets  and  that  these  are  composed  of  the 
same  elements  being  bone  of  your  bone  and  sub- 
stance of  your  substance  which  can  now  no  longer 
hold  you  in  abeyance  for  you  have  reached  the 
rung  in  the  ladder  of  life  where  we  have  attained 
the  power  which  enables  you  to  master  the  ele- 

142 


ments  instead  of  being  enslaved  by  them.  With  this 
ever  present  fact  before  you — your  Soul  reaches 
out  into  the  distant  realms  to  explore  and  inves- 
tigate their  chemical  constituents  and  procliv- 
ities to  a  greater  degree  realizing  that  when  you 
do  this  you  will  know  yourself  better — and  as  you 
get  better  aquainted  with  yourself  you  will  draw 
closer  to  God  and  recognize  your  relationship  and 
kinship  with  Him  in  a  larger  degree  of  conscious- 
ness. 

So  here  you  will  find  many  Adepts  and  Masters 
spending  hours  and  hours  with  the  telescope — 
spectroscope  and  other  instruments  not  yet  known 
here  on  the  earth  realm. 

You  will  find  Chemists  experimenting  in  their 
Labroatories  dissecting  the  Atom  or  the  Ions  and 
corpuscles  of  which  it  is  composed — or  concentrat- 
ing them  into  groups  watching  the  results  that 
the  Power  of  the  Will  can  manifest  over  them. 
They  have  a  process  for  gathering  the  atoms  that 
are  floating  in  space  sent  forth  by  the  various 
Suns  and  planets  and  these  are  carefully  analyzed- 
but  as  yet  the  finite  Mind  is  too  dormant  to  com- 
prehend the  workings  of  the  finer  forces  of  Nature 
which  are  so  tangible  to  us  in  this  world  of  Soul. 

Chemistry  has  reached  a  high  degree  of  per- 
fection in  this  Zone.  Many  Astronomers  work  in 
unison  with  the  Chemists  and  these  join  another 
class  called  Astrologers  who  fathom  the  inter- 
action of  the  Cosmic  Forces  and  their  influence 
upon  the  Evolution  of  Conscious  Intelligences  as 


143 


well  as  that  of  this  planet.  The  dwellers  are 
taught  how  to  control  the  Elements  Intelligently 
and  thereby  to  have  the  power  to  travel  unhind- 
ered through  the  dense  belts  of  this  mundane 
shere  or  out  even  beyond  our  Solar  System  under 
all  conditions. 

In  the  near  future  when  the  disturbing  elements 
of  the  present  day  have  been  squelched  or  elim- 
inated and  the  constructive  period  is  over  then 
the  inhabitants  of  this  world  will  enjoy  advantages 
due  to  inventions  and  discoveries  perfected  in  the 
Soul  world  which  at  the  present  time  are  not  even 
thought  of  and  these  will  be  handed  down  to  such 
individuals  as  are  adapted  and  capable  in  every 
way  to  perfect  them  for  use  here  on  this  earth 
plane. 

This  world  must  first  be  made  ready  and  fit 
for  such  blessings  and  enjoyments  as  are  await- 
ing their  conscious  appreciation  of  them — so  that 
they  will  not  ignorantly  and  maliciously  play  with 
God's  priveleges  for  commercial  and  individual 
graft  instead  of  for  Universal  use  and  benefits — 
and  the  sacred  privilege  and  advancement  of  every 
individual. 

All  of  the  inventions  of  the  lower  Zones  are 
brought  here  in  this  Fifth  Zone  for  perfection 
and  these  are  tried  out  and  thoroughly  tested 
before  they  are  considered  ready  for  our  earth 
realm.  After  this  has  been  accomplished  they 
search  for  an  individual  who  is  sufficiently  ad- 
vanced and  capable  of  receiving  the  message  and 

144 


imparting  it  to  the  world  to  its  best  advantage. 
Many  times  the  individuals  do  not  receive  their 
impressions  and  inspiration  perfectly  and  as  a  re- 
sult others  must  come  along  to  improve  upon  their 
short  comings  causing  delay. 

In  this  world  of  Soul  has  been  perfected  an 
instrument  which  will  enable  every  individual  to 
have  direct  communication  with  the  dwellers  of 
these  various  Zones.  This  instrument  will  in 
the  near  future  be  found  in  nearly  every  home 
to  the  same  extent  that  you  now  find  the  Victrola 
or  the  telephone.  It  will  be  considered  one  of  the 
necessities  and  the  greatest  commodity  and  com- 
fort and  a  greater  benefit  than  even  our  telephones 
and  telegraphic  systems  are  considered  at  the 
present  time.  For  many  years  they  have  been 
waiting  to  give  this  to  this  material  world  but  the 
world  must  first  be  made  fit  for  its  benefits.  This 
instrument  will  wipe  out  all  superstition — all  hin- 
drances and  obstructions  that  have  been  created 
by  the  ignorant  of  all  the  ages.  The  interaction 
of  the  two  worlds  is  as  natural  as  the  interaction  of 
the  Cosmic  Forces  and  it  is  God's  Law  which  no 
human  being  can  wipe  out  or  change  so  the  sooner 
we  educate  ourselves  to  God's  methods  and  com- 
ply with  His  plan  and  His  Laws  the  quicker  will 
the  world  get  rid  of  the  turmoil  and  suffering 
impinged  upon  all  humanity  throughout  the  ages 
of  this  planet  caused  by  working  against  God  and 
His  Laws  instead  of  working  in  harmony  with 
Him  and  for  Him.  When  you  do  what  is  just 


145 


and  right  towards  your  brother  man  regardless 
of  His  color  or  race  or  regardless  of  His  degree 
of  Consciousness  which  reveals  his  plane  of  un- 
foldment  then  you  will  work  in  harmony  with  God 
and  His  Laws. 

Mans  efforts  have  been  wholly  directed  for 
Self  and  Selfish  interests  and  he  has  permitted 
nothing  which  he  considered  an  obstacle  to  stand 
in  his  way  to  carry  out  his  Selfish  plans — but 
the  world  will  yet  be  cleansed  and  such  barbarism 
and  selfishness  wiped  out  for  the  benefit  of  Man- 
kind— then  the  inhabitants  of  this  planet  will 
work  in  unison  for  the  advancement  of  the  Soul 
realizing  that  if  we  seek  the  Kingdom  of  God 
first  all  else  will  be  added. 

Then  our  methods  of  worship  will  change  and 
a  new  religion  will  dawn  upon  the  Consciousness 
of  Man.  He  will  see  within  Himself  the  likeness 
unto  God.  He  will  feel  His  relationship  with  all 
Nature  and  see  the  golden  thread  that  binds  all 
humanity  in  One  continuous  chain  of  life — each 
expressing  an  essential  and  important  part  in  the 
Whole  Scheme  of  God's  handiwork.  He  will  see 
himself  as  one  of  the  links  of  this  chain  that 
would  be  wholly  incomplete  without  him — So  sac- 
red so  essential — so  important  is  every  Soul  to 
God.  The  Universe  could  not  exist  without  even 
the  minutest  particle  that  flows  to  make  up  the 
whole.  Then  how  much  more  sacred  and  im- 
portant is  that  individualized  Conscious  Entity 
we  call  man.  Oh  Thou  Infinite  Source  and  Fount- 


146 


ain  of  All  Life  and  Light  All  is  of  Thine  own 
Creation — so  lead  us  and  help  us  to  lift  the  veil 
that  man  may  see  Thy  Sacred  plan. 

Around  the  most  central  Fountain  of  this  Zone 
is  found  the  lotus  flower  which  is  symbolic  of 
Divine  Motherhood  through  which  germination 
appeared  and  All  existence  are  formed.  The  Di- 
vine Mother  is  expressed  in  All  forms  of  Nature — 
in  the  germination  of  all  forms  of  existence.  We 
must  be  endowed  with  Divine  Wisdom  to  perceive 
the  correct  meaning  of  the  manifestations  of  these 
higher  kingdoms  where  all  is  symbolic  of  Divine 
Life.  The  Divine  Mother  is  held  with  great  rev- 
erence in  the  Soul  world  and  is  found  represented 
as  the  Madona  in  the  various  Temples  of  Worship 
where  she  is  looked  upon  as  very  Sacred.  In  the 
higher  Zones  God  is  worshiped  as  the  Fatherhood 
and  Motherhood  of  All  Life  and  all  Light. 

In  ancient  times  everything  was  veiled  in  sym- 
bols. Science — Art  Astronomy  and  no  one  could 
understand  these  symbols  except  those  who  had 
evolved  the  Divine  Attributes  of  their  Being  as 
only  such  had  perception  or  realization  of  these 
Truths  or  facts.  In  the  days  when  the  Great 
Pyramid  was  constructed — across  the  shaft  where 
the  Light  falls  from  the  Central  Sun  in  the  direc- 
tion of  Alcyon  all  calculations  were  made.  This 
Pyramid  was  supposed  to  be  in  the  exact  center 
of  this  Globe  our  Earth.  The  Light  falling 
through  this  shaft  was  symbolic  of  the  Great 
Central  Sun  or  Light  around  which  our  Solar 


147 


system  revolves  and  also  all  other  solar  systems — 
it  was  symbolic  of  the  Divine  Wisdom  held  in  the 
angles  of  Light  where  they  meet  our  Globe  the 
Earth.  The  symbol  of  Light  is  represented  by  the 
Sun — germination  by  the  Lotus  the  Divine  Mother. 
In  those  days  the  Truth  was  not  veiled  to  keep 
the  masses  in  ignorance  but  to  protect  them  from 
temptations  of  misusing  a  Law  they  could  not 
understand  or  comprehend  in  their  degree  of  un- 
foldment.  These  Divine  Intelligencies  know  better 
than  we  that  the  human  family  shifts  very  slowly 
and  our  own  blindness  called  our  prejudices  has 
been  our  worst  enemy — which  all  must  some  time 
overcome.  For  nearly  two  thousand  years  the 
human  family  have  taken  Christ's  teachings  either 
literally — figuratively — materially  in  fact  from 
every  conceivable  Viewpoint  Except  in  its  true 
Meaning — even  denying  He  ever  existed  and  func- 
tioned on  this  Earth  realm — and  we  have  reaped 
the  culmination  of  our  thoughts  and  actions  caused 
by  our  misconceptions  which  Christ  called  the 
Reaping  of  our  Sowing. 

Again  I  will  remind  you  that  in  the  world  of  Soul 
thousands  of  Angels  gather  together  to  decide  up- 
on the  structure  they  desire  to  erect — and  its 
minutest  details  are  taken  into  consideration,  and 
when  all  has  been  planned  they  in  unison  concen- 
trate their  Power  for  the  accomplishment  of  this 
structure  and  their  thoughts  become  objectified 
or  manifest. 

In  your  ramble  through  this  Zone  you  will  see 

148 


a  most  imposing  structure  of  white  stone — not 
such  as  is  found  here — it  is  of  a  much  smoother 
finer  texture  has  the  appearance  of  white  chalk. 
This  building  is  seven  stories  high — occupies  what 
we  call  a  block. — Sets  on  a  very  high  elevation 
that  overlooks  the  entire  Zone — surrounded  by 
beautiful  shrubbery-vines  and  flowers,  along 
the  outer  walls  and  pathway  and  by  a 
carpet  of  soft  velvety  grass — a  narrow  winding 
path  perfectly  clean  and  smooth  leading  to  this 
wonderful  Sacred  Temple  from  the  center  of  this 
City. 

On  the  side  are  many  latticed  arches  and  arbors 
covered  with  wisteria  in  purple  and  white  corres- 
ponding with  the  robes  that  are  worn  by  the 
dwellers  in  this  Zone.  Under  these  arches  are 
reclining  seats  for  rest  and  meditation  and  while 
resting  here  you  are  attracted  to  the  hyacinths — 
China  lillies — calla  lillies  and  heliotrope  twining 
around  the  trellises — the  Jasmine  and  white  roses. 
All  the  flowers  in  this  Zone  are  yellow — white  and 
yellow  purple  and  wisteria  shades  and  white.  The 
inspiration  from  such  a  combination  of  flowers  so 
perfectly  matured  with  this  exquisite  Temple  and 
surroundings  where  you  face  a  View  of  God's  mag- 
nificent beauties  displayed  in  Nature  is  impossible 
to  describe. 

This  building  is  longer  than  wide  with  its  three 
corners — the  fourth  being  cut  off  into  a  semi-circ- 
ular opening — from  which  branch  the  entrance  to 
many  separate  apartments  on  the  various  floors. 

149 


Many  steps  of  semi-circular  form  increasing  in 
dimension  on  the  ground  and  graduating  to  the 
entrance  of  the  door  on  the  ground  floor. 

In  the  center  of  the  structure  you  will  find  a 
large  room  or  hall  where  the  dwellers  gather  for 
daily  worship.  In  the  center  of  this  room  is  a 
Fountain  of  water  whose  sprays  are  like  the  rad- 
iance of  pure  diamonds.  A  railing  of  pure  gold 
separates  the  Masters  (who  come  here  to  teach) 
from  the  audience.  In  back  of  this  railing  is  the 
platform  on  which  gather  Masters  and  in  the  cent- 
er is  an  alter  of  pure  gold  from  which  are  given 
the  words  of  Our  Great  Master  Jesus  the  Nazarene 
known  as  the  Christ.  Oftimes  you  will  find  on  the 
platform  of  this  gathering  some  of  the  Apostles 
and  other  Shining  Lights  whose  words  of  Wisdom 
would  baffle  the  ordinary  intelligence.  Also  other 
distinguished  characters  are  seen  on  the  platform. 
The  flowers  surrounding  this  Fountain  of  Diamond 
sprays  are  of  pure  white — gold — light  yellow  and 
purple  or  wistaria  shades. 

The  gold  represents  the  Illumination  of  the 
Soul  and  the  purple  the  degree  of  Wisdom.  Here 
the  dwellers  receive  the  blessings — inspiration  and 
Wisdom  from  the  Higher  Inteligences  which  char- 
ges the  very  atmoshere  with  their  Holiness. 

The  Masters  always  wear  their  robes  of  white 
and  gold.  Every  one's  degree  of  unfoldment  and 
position  is  designated  by  the  robes  which  they 
wear — as  there  are  various  Masters  of  different 
degrees  and  rulership. 

150 


There  are  many  windows  that  are  irridescent 
which  emit  the  light  like  the  sprays  of  water 
from  that  magnificent  Fountain.  The  tops  of  the 
windows  are  inlaid  representing  most  beautiful 
scenery.  The  interior  decorations  all  blend  in  the 
same  delicate  irridescent  shades.  Cupids  and 
garlands  of  flowers  painted  in  the  most  delicate 
tints  are  in  back  of  the  platform  which  is  shaped 
like  an  alcove.  Pictures  of  Madonnas  and  Mes- 
iahs  are  painted  in  the  most  delicate  tints  on  the 
walls  all  of  which  is  the  work  of  some  of  the 
finest  Artists. 

Here  you  will  find  an  orchestra  and  choir  of 
the  most  high  degree  of  musical  perfection  and 
are  classed  as  genuine  artists — such  symphony 
and  harmony  could  not  be  realized  by  the  finite 
Mind  but  is  in  tune  with  this  Zone.  This  exquisite 
structure  is  called  the  "Temple  of  Love'*  which 
words  are  inscribed  in  letters  of  Gold  above  the 
entrance  doorway.  The  delicate  pale  blue  light 
of  this  Zone  intermingling  with  these  irredescent 
delicate  shades  throws  a  delicate  hew  of  palest 
lavender  over  all.  Words  are  inadequate  to  des- 
cribe this  sublime  beauty  which  charms  the  Soul. 

In  the  Fourth  Zone  in  the  Cathedral  you  had 
placed  before  you  a  tray  of  most  precious  jewels 
of  every  color  and  kind  from  which  you  selected 
your  choice.  This  jewel  was  taken  by  the  teacher 
to  this  Zone  and  placed  in  the  Temple  of  Love 
where  the  Masters  read  your  life  through  its  Vi- 
brations. The  jewel  we  have  selected  has  its  own 

151 


rate  of  vibration  and  from  this  vibration  the  Mas- 
ters know  our  Soul  growth  and  our  destiny.  Here 
they  judge  us  not  to  condemn  us  for  our  mistakes 
or  to  chastise  us  for  the  state  of  our  growth  or 
degree  of  Consciousness  we  have  attained  but  to 
reveal  to  us  that  which  we  are  best  fitted  for  in 
either  world.  In  our  present  pursuits  in  the  Soul 
World  and  in  our  work  to  render  proficient  service 
to  humanity  on  this  earth  realm  and  these  are 
the  instructions  the  intelligencies  follow  to  the 
letter  for  they  realize  these  Masters  have  theWis- 
dom  to  penetrate  and  reveal  the  Law. 

In  following  these  instructions  it  assists  us  in 
climbing  the  ladder  of  life  for  we  are  about  half- 
way on  our  journey  through  the  Soul  world  of 
this  planet.  We  have  two  more  Heavenly  Zones 
and  two  more  Celestial  Heavens  ere  we  enter  the 
Third  Celestial  heaven  which  is  the  Fountain  of 
Bliss  and  rest.  Here  we  are  properly  placed  ac- 
cording to  our  Soul  growth  or  degree  of  Conscious- 
ness as  we  continue  to  function  in  the  world  of 
Soul  and  at  the  same  time  render  active  service 
for  the  upliftment  of  those  on  the  lower  rungs  on 
the  ladder  of  life  in  both  worlds. 

In  this  Zone  we  have  become  United  as  One 
family  having  One  Purpose.  United  through  Di- 
vine Love — the  Greatest  Dynamic  Power  in  the 
Universe.  United  to  serve  God  by  uplfting  His 
Children  so  in  Unison  they  work  as  God's  messen- 
gers to  accomplish  many  things  for  the  benefit 
and  uplift  of  the  Soul. 

152 


This  Divine  Love  is  the  link  that  binds  all  hu- 
manity. It  is  the  Light  that  Illumines  our  Soul 
that  consumes  all  selfishness  and  is  the  Power 
that  transmutes  all  the  discordant  elements  into 
Harmony  and  Peace. 

At  last  we  are  conscious  of  our  Unity  with  Him 
and  feel  the  touch  of  His  Infinite  Breath.  The 
Curtain  of  Self  has  been  lifted  and  the  Veil  is  being 
torn  asunder  and  the  Soul  is  reaching  out  across 
the  threshhold  to  the  Infinite  for  we  realize  that 
the  Light  which  now  radiates  from  our  Being  is 
One  with  the  Infinite  Divine  Source  whose  Essence 
is  Divine  Love. 

Mans*  desires  have  been  many  and  madly  he 
has  run  after  the  varied  objects  of  this  world  for 
here  he  thinks  he  has  his  life  and  fulfillment. 
Little  does  he  know  or  ever  think  of  the  vastness 
of  the  Life  before  Him.  This  clanish  selfish  pur- 
pose has  caused  many  conflicts  and  contradictions 
unhappiness  and  discontent.  But  at  last  all  the 
conflicts  and  contradictions  of  his  life  have  be- 
come harmonized  and  in  Unison  they  carry  out 
God's  Grand  Plan  through  the  Spirit  of  Divine 
Love.  Doing  Good  for  the  sake  of  Good  and  to 
do  good  is  in  itself  an  act  that  creates  happiness. 
Here  they  are  not  only  happy  but  peace  and  joy 
fills  the  Soul. 

They  know  our  sorrows  and  requirements  but 
they  also  know  the  outcome  and  purpose.  They 
so  thoroughly  know  God's  Law  that  they  see  His 
Will  in  all  there  is.  They  know  that  in  many 


153 


cases  our  sorrows  and  trials  soften  the  heart  and 
chissel  off  the  rough  edges  of  our  character — 
giving  us  greater  poise — a  firmer  foundation — a 
broader  view  and  a  larger  and  more  brilliant  con- 
sciousness, i 

Who  has  not  felt  the  gentle  breeze  of  hope 
wafted  o'er  his  brow  or  the  soft  touch  of  an  un- 
seen hand  or  heard  the  whisper  of  some  sweet 
voice  or  seen  an  unexpected  angelic  face  in  the 
hours  of  our  greatest  need — our  deepest  sorrows  ? 
All  to  assure  us  that  we  are  not  alone  and  that 
God  in  some  way  always  provides  for  our  needs 
through  His  messengers  of  Light — if  we  but  open 
the  doors  of  our  Souls — to  let  the  Light  flow  in. 

This  does  not  mean  that  we  should  grow  to  be 
dependent  upon  Invisible  helpers  or  forces.  Not 
at  all.  Everything  in  the  Universe  tends  towards 
individualization  and  at  the  same  time  nothing 
can  be  independent.  Everything  is  dependent  up- 
on something  else  either  directly  or  indirectly  and 
where  there  is  mutual  interaction  of  elements  and 
forces  the  Divine  purpose  is  carried  forth  in  every 
plane  or  Kingdom  of  life,  The  lowei*  is  always 
subservient  to  the  higher  and  the  higher  tends 
towards  uplifting  the  lower.  So  it  is  with  Man. 

The  dweller  of  this  Zone  displays  his  individual- 
ized power  which  he  has  attained  through  efforts- 
experiences — knowledge  and  unfoldment  conquer- 
ing the  elements  of  destruction  and  transmuting 
them  into  constructive  forces  not  only  within  hmv 
self  but  with  all  whom  he  comes  in  contact 


154 


with.  The  influence  tends  towards  strengthening 
the  weak  points  of  our  character  by  bringing  them 
into  our  consciousness  and  causing  us  to  see  our- 
selves as  they  see  us  and  as  we  really  are  and 
then  point  out  the  way  for  us  to  follow.  It  is  our 
privilege  to  walk  in  that  path  or  reject  it. 

They  do  not  live  our  life  and  we  could  not  live 
theirs.  They  give  us  glimpses  or  visions  of  the 
right  way.  They  cast  reflections  into  our  con- 
sciousness of  that  which  is  Just — that  which  is 
Good — then  leave  it  to  us  to  choose  and  if  we 
choose  the  right  way — then  they  lend  their  power 
and  force  to  boost  us  in  that  direction — clearing 
the  path  of  all  destructive  forces  and  obstacles. 
This  is  only  one  way  in  which  they  answer  our 
prayers  for  guidance  and  help — for  God  answers 
our  prayer  through  His  Messengers.  Numerous 
ways  they  have  to  do  Good  for  the  uplift  of  the 
Soul. 

Every  prayer  brings  its  answer,  not  always  as 
we  have  asked  for  it,  but  in  the  way  that  is  best 
for  us,  and  as  we  look  back  into  our  lives  we  are 
able  to  discern  how  wise  is  that  which  we  call 
Divine  providence  for  the  very  things  which 
seemed  such  a  disappointment  were  the  stepping 
stones  toward  something  better  and  our  darkest 
and  deepest  trials  are  oftimes  the  symbols  of  the 
brighter  things  which  follow  and  many  times  in 
spite  of  the  apparent  obstructions  the  Light 
comes  and  shines  in  its  fullness. 

In  the  world  of  Soul  as  we  pass  from  Zone  to 

155 


Zone  we  leave  in  every  Zone  the  outer  garment 
through  which  we  functioned  in  that  zone.  The 
Soul  now  is  of  much  finer  Substance  and  no  longer 
needs  food  to  sustain  its  Being.  The  Fourth  Zone 
was  the  first  belt  in  which  the  dwellers  subsisted 
through  the  Law  of  assimilation  and  here  our 
Soul  body  is  much  more  ethereal  and  more  porous 
than  the  Fourth.  It  is  necessary  that  we  remind 
you  of  this  fact  that  you  will  be  able  to  compre- 
hend the  still  finer  states  of  our  Being  as  we  pro- 
ceed on  our  March  of  Ascension. 

The  activity  in  the  world  of  Soul  is  very  intense. 
These  Intelligences  are  constantly  doing  Good 
answering  the  cries  for  help  that  reach  the  world 
of  Soul.  It  is  because  the  finite  mind  cannot  com- 
prehend the  Infinite  and  because  the  finite  Mind 
has  not  been  educated  to  understand  Natural  Laws 
that  man  is  filled  with  doubt  and  fear  and  the 
superstitious  tendencies  have  not  yet  been  wholly 
eliminated  and  he  does  not  even  devote  a  moment 
of  constructive  thought  to  their  ways  and  means 
or  their  possibilities,  hence  how  can  he  under- 
stand how  they  in  the  world  of  Soul  do  construc- 
tive work  for  the  benefit  and  uplift  of  the  Soul  that 
still  functions  in  a  physical  body  on  this  earth 
realm. 

If  you  could  comprehend  their  Resources — their 
Wisdom — their  Power,  then  you  would  lend  an  ear 
to  their  Voice — devote  a  few  moments  of  your 
time  in  Thought  of  them — nevertheless  they  reach 
those  who  are  ready  for  their  assistance.  In  the 


156 


world  of  Soul  they  are  not  encumbered  with  the 
limitations  of  a  dense  heavy  physical  body — and 
are  free  from  all  Man  Made  Laws  and  all  material 
obstructions,  hence  can  accomplish  much. 

In  these  higher  Zones  they  have  attained  the 
power  to  disintegrate  the  crystalized  vibrations  of 
obstruction  and  destruction  and  centralize  Con- 
structive Vibrations  that  will  produce  conducive 
results  for  the  betterment  and  Uplift  of  the 
World.  It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that 
these  manifest  only  to  the  extent  that  man  himself 
becomes  a  conscious  participant  and  is  cognizant 
of  the  Uplift  or  benefit  derived.  Any  logical  mind 
can  fathom  these  facts. 

Why  is  it  that  whenever  any  Soul  in  the  physical 
body  confronts  some  terrible  crisis  or  danger  that 
his  Soul  immediately  becomes  quickened  with  un- 
usual strength  and  Power?  Did  it  ever  occur  to 
you  that  somie  unseen  Force  or  Intelligence  might 
be  near?  If  your  Soul  was  sufficiently  unfolded  or 
in  other  words — had  reached  a  higher  degree  of 
consciousness  you  would  be  in  tune  with  what 
now  is  invisible  and  the  whole  scheme  would  be 
visible  to  your  consciousness  as  a  clear  unveiled 
Reality. 

Man  on  this  physical  plane  is  so  full  of  Self 
laudation  that  he  likes  to  think  that  he  has  evol- 
ved all  the  power  that  manifests  through  him- 
self. He  does  not  realize  that  while  he  has  the 
powers  and  potentialities  within  his  Soul  of  a 
Confusius — a  Christ — a  Shakespeare  and  one 


157 


might  go  on  down  the  line  to  our  present  day 
powerful  Souls — yet  all  of  these  had  been  quick- 
ened by  higher  Intelligences  not  only  that  but  man 
on  this  earth  realm  is  just  entering  the  path  that 
leads  to  Wisdom  and  Power.  He  is  still  on  the 
lower  rung  on  the  ladder  of  life  and  these  Intelli- 
gences who  come  to  assist  humanity  have  evolved 
to  the  higher  rungs  and  have  attained  the  Wisdom 
and  Power  which  we  have  yet  to  accumulate. 

Even  Christ  was  surrounded  by  still  Higher 
Beings  than  Himself  and  said  He  could  command 
the  Hosts  of  Heaven  to  prevent  His  crucifixion — 
which  He  could  have  done.  So  it  is  unto  all  Men. 
No  One  is  ever  alone. 

During  this  terrible  war  from  the  world  of 
Soul  came  the  response  for  help  and  many  of  the 
Civilians  and  Soldiers  heard  the  Voices  and  saw 
the  Light  and  came  face  to  face  with  these  Illu- 
mined Intelligenses  who  hovered  near  amid  the 
roar  of  cannon  and  strife  they  guided  and  directed 
and  assisted  as  best  they  could  under  the  circum- 
stances. Many  heard  the  Voices  crying  out  "Re- 
fuse to  fight  your  brother  man."  This  powerful 
influence  modified  many  circumstances  not  gen- 
erally known. 

The  curruption  that  from  time  to  time  is  being 
promulgated  in  various  channels  here  on  this  earth 
realm  is  known  in  the  world  of  Soul  long  ere  it 
manifests  in  this  life. 

Our  thoughts  and  intentions  are  registered  from 
day  to  day  in  the  Universal  Ether  and  they  are 

158 


able  to  see  these  culminate  and  bear  fruit  of  its 
own  kind.  Much  is  modified  and  prevented  and 
much  is  allowed  to  bear  its  own  fruit — as  it  is 
through  such  experiences  that  man  awakens  and 
then  ripens  into  higher  ideals. 

In  the  world  of  Soul  they  require  very  little 
rest  so  that  the  activity  is  almost  incessant.  The 
urge  to  do  good  is  increasing  and  in  their  steps 
of  ascension  they  have  learned  to  master  their 
own  inclinations  and  have  turned  their  personal 
desires  into  Universal  interests  and  requirements 
and  a  Universal  Love  so  that  in  Unison  they  send 
forth  their  Power  for  the  upliftment  of  human 
welfare  in  every  direction  to  meet  the  demands  and 
requirements  of  our  present  day  needs.  Results 
are  brought  about  as  rapidly  as  the  Minds  of  the 
individuals  on  this  earth  realm  absorb  this  Vision 
and  bend  their  efforts  in  the  direction  into  which 
this  Dvine  influence  leads  them. 

The  interaction  of  the  Ethereal  and  Material 
world  can  not  be  obstructed  nor  prevented.  Re- 
gardless of  the  prejudices  and  superstition  of  the 
ages  the  Eternal  Power  has  flown  into  the  var- 
ious avenues  through  the  various  individuals  and 
in  spite  of  the  clamour  of  the  clergy  and  the  lay- 
man God's  work  has  gone  on  in  His  own  Good 
way  through  His  Messengers  of  Light  and  will 
always  continue  to  do  so  as  it  is  so  ordained 
through  His  Law. 

Humanity  cannot  isolate  or  separate  themselves 
into  groups  and  willfully  plot  and  plan  against 

159 


His  brotherman  without  reaping  the  result. 
Neither  can  they  separate  or  isolate  themselves 
from  God's  Great  Plan. 

All  must  work  in  Unison  and  in  harmony  with 
God  and  not  against  His  Law,  that  is  His  Divine 
Plan.  So  those  who  have  advanced  in  the  World 
of  Soul  work  in  harmony  with  His  plan  by  assist- 
ing and  uplifting  those  who  are  on  their  journey — 
not  to  live  their  life — nor  to  dictate  or  hinder  but 
to  beckon  the  Soul  onward — pointing  the  way  and 
lending  their  force  that  they  will  not  linger  by  the 
wayside  or  tarry  so  long  in  the  darkness.  They 
reach  those  who  are  ready  for  assistance  that  they 
may  reach  the  objective  point  in  their  journey 
without  so  much  suffering  and  delay. 

The  human  family  is  always  assisted  in  both 
worlds  by  those  who  have  progressed  beyond  the 
limitations  of  the  lower  belts  into  the  higher  scale 
of  life  where  the  Divine  Power  of  the  Soul  could  by 
its  very  touch  transmute  the  lower  into  the  high- 
er. All  in  the  World  of  Soul  obey  the  Will  of  God 
who  carries  forth  His  Eternal  Scheme  through 
the  Law  of  Evolution  and  all  follow  its  dictations 
which  is  God's  plan. 

From  time  to  time  Messiahs  have  embodied  to 
show  the  way  but  through  the  blind  impulses  and 
material  tendencies  prevailing  their  Mission  and 
Wisdom  has  always  been  misconstrued  by  the 
masses  and  the  few  who  were  ready  for  guidance 
have  profited  and  gone  on  to  the  heights  where 
the  blessings  of  God's  Wisdom  awaited  them. 

160 


So  while  in  the  lower  Zones  the  Intelligences 
worked  faithfully  to  do  good  to  lift  themselves 
here  in  this  Holy  Zone  they  abide  by  the  higher 
law  and  such  thoughts  have  been  wholly  trans- 
muted into  perfect  unselfishness  and  the  Spirit  of 
Love  is  the  urge  that  has  quickened  the  Soul 
through  sympathy  into  action  to  Do  good  for  the 
sake  of  Universal  Good. 

In  their  Temples  of  learning  much  is  imparted 
by  the  Masters  and  Apostles  of  Still  Greater  King- 
doms of  still  greater  Beings  than  themselves  of 
still  greater  heights  to  be  attained  of  still  Greater 
Solar  Systems  of  worlds  and  still  greater  oppor- 
tunities and  of  still  Greater  Glories  for  the  Soul 
to  behold  and  bask  in  its  Eternal  Light. 

Not  only  that  but  we  here  learn  through  the 
Masters  the  facts  of  still  lower  Kingdoms.  The 
lesser  Souls — the  Unruly — the  dissatisfied,  egotist- 
ical Self  Centered  temperments — who  in  their 
Egotism  think  they  could  Rule  the  world — estab- 
lish laws  and  control  the  Universe  better  than  God 
and  His  Angels — or  His  Ruling  Angels — and  His 
Messiahs  and  All  other  Lights  combined.  They 
want  world  dominion  and  so  they  are  given  an 
opportunity  to  demonstrate  their  power  of  Self 
conceit  and  such  Souls  become  dwellers  on  those 
fragments  in  our  Solar  system  known  as  the 
Asteroids  until  such  time  as  is  necessary  for  their 
awakening  and  their  Conscious  recognition  of 
God's  Laws  and  His  Plan.  There  is  no  Absolute 
perfection  except  in  God  and  there  is  no  perfect 

161 


harmony  without  a  compromise  and  this  we  find 
expressed  in  God's  Kingdom  of  our  Solar  System. 
Here  is  found  a  comprise  which  takes  care  of  the 
Unruly — So  that  the  perfect  scale  of  ascension 
will  be  uninterrupted — without  discord. 

Thus  the  path  is  uninterrupted  in  this  world  of 
Soul  around  this  planet,  our  Earth.  All  must 
travel  the  Same  path  of  gradual  ascension 
through  this  country  to  fit  themselves  for  the 
heavenly  Zones  and  in  the  heavenly  Zones  prepare 
for  the  Celestial  Heavens,  which  are  so  much 
higher  in  the  scale  of  life  that  the  lower  Zones 
seem  but  a  shadow  in  comparison.  And  in  these 
Glorious  shores  we  prepare  for  our  Union.  All  of 
which  will  be  given  through  the  pages  of  Volume 
two. 

While  the  homes  in  this  Zone  are  so  sublimely 
beautiful  they  have  been  constructed  for  privacy 
as  the  dwellers  use  them  very  little,  for  here  they 
live  out  of  doors  with  Nature  most  of  the  time  and 
for  weeks  and  months  leave  their  families  and 
friends  and  sweethearts  to  retire  to  the  Moun- 
tains or  the  deserts  for  meditation  and  concentra- 
tion and  to  put  into  practice  and  into  activity  the 
power  of  their  Will — that  they  may  demonstrate 
the  power  of  spirit  over  matter  in  the  degree  of 
their  present  unfoldment.  Causing  manifestation 
out  of  the  Unmanif  ested  producing  certain  degrees 
of  life.  Here  you  not  only  realize  that  you  are  a 
Creator,  but  you  demonstrate  your  power  in  this 
Zone,  and  as  the  opportunities  present  themselves 

162 


for  the  benefit  and  uplift  of  some  Soul,  regardless 
of  race — color — belief  or  creed — regardless  of  con- 
ditions, no  matter  how  low  in  the  scale  of  life  that 
individual  may  be,  the  power  of  good  is  imparted 
for  the  uplift  of  that  Soul.  This  is  the  Divine 
mission  of  those  in  the  higher  scale  of  life.  They 
also  realize  that  their  power  is  yet  in  its  infancy, 
for  the  light  has  just  burst  forth — having  been 
dimmed  in  the  past  by  the  veil  of  materiality.  In 
other  words,  through  the  Vibrations  of  the  crude 
animal  tendencies  of  selfishness  egotism  and  men- 
tal emotions  which  the  Soul  completely  overcame 
and  cast  off  ere  entering  in  this  Holy  atmosphere 
the  Light  of  the  Soul  could  not  radiate  its  power 
in  the  degree  it  now  manifests. 

Many  satisfactory  results  are  accomplished  in 
their  work  for  the  uplift  of  the  Soul  as  they  work 
in  unison  and  where  there  is  union  there  is 
strength.  Many  Souls  in  the  Ethereal  world  are 
dumbfounded  and  surprised  beyond  expression  at 
the  effects  that  the  Good  Unselfish  Works  has 
upon  their  own  Being.  The  effects  of  the  Power 
of  Divine  Love  cast  upon  some  unfortunate  Soul 
and  its  reaction  upon  their  own  Being.  So  mar- 
velous— so  intensely  interesting — so  unspeakably 
satisfying  are  these  results  that  untiring  are  their 
efforts  to  accomplish  Good.  They  realize  that  they 
are  Messengers  of  God  and  as  they  do  unto  the 
least  they  are  doing  unto  Him. 

Their  homes  are  constructed  of  Stone  inlaid 
with  precious  jewels  and  gems.  The  architecture 


163 


is  very  unique,  suited  to  their  requirements  and 
ideals.  Every  home  has  its  rooms  for  concentra- 
tion or  soul  communion — and  its  private  rooms  for 
rest.  Many  have  their  private  Libraries,  Music 
rooms — living  rooms,  reception  rooms  and  their 
porches.  Most  elegantly  are  these  furnished, 
always  in  perfect  harmony  with  their  Soul  Vibra- 
tion— as  every  Soul  has  its  own  special  rate  of 
Vibration — and  every  Vibration  its  color  and 
shades. 

Their  rest  rooms  require  the  greatest  consider- 
ation. Much  of  their  furniture  is  in  gold  inlaid 
with  jewels  and  upholstered  in  very  dainty,  deli- 
cate shades — and  much  of  it  is  found  in  white  and 
gold — all  very  downy  and  soft.  The  homes  are 
surrounded  by  vines,  beautiful  shrubbery — per- 
enials  and  flowers.  As  you  approach  their  homes 
you  are  attracted  to  the  beautiful  white  statuary 
on  the  entrance  oft  heir  home  or  on  the  front 
lawn  amid  beds  of  flowers  such  as  Centuries — Iris 
— golden  poppies — Agapanus — purple  orchid — 
gypsavilla  and  others.  Here  you  will  see  the  beau- 
tiful Jackeranda  tree.  Trellises,  latticed  arbors 
entwined  with  roses  and  vines,  all  add  to  the 
artistic  settings  of  these  homes.  Their  magnifi- 
cent trees  spread  their  branches  like  a  canopy  in- 
viting the  traveler  to  rest  under  its  cosy  nook. 

Art  and  Beauty  are  the  fruition  of  the  Soul 
and  do  not  belong  to  the  physical  desires,  for  as 
the  Soul  unfolds  more  and  more  of  perfection  and 
the  Glorious,  sublime  Beauty  within  itself — its 

164 


natural  consequence  is  that  it  longs  to  be  sur- 
rounded by  all  the  beauty  that  harmonizes  with 
its  own  expression  and  rate  of  Vibration.  All  na- 
ture displays  her  charms  of  Beauty  more  exqui- 
sitely, more  perfectly  and  more  beautifully  in  the 
higher  kingdoms  of  life — or  in  these  higher  vibra- 
tions blending  most  marvelously  with  the  higher 
ideals  of  the  Soul — expressing  in  beauty  and  sym- 
metry their  Glorious  light. 

There  is  a  great  significance  in  the  fact  that  we 
find  not  only  the  jewels  in  every  Zone  are  those 
which  vibrate  with  it,  but  also  the  flowers.  Shrub- 
bery— ferns — perenials,  all  differ  in  every  Zone,  in 
fact  when  the  finite  Mind  can  comprehend  the  Law 
of  Vibration  then  he  will  know  that  all  of  these 
like  the  birds  that  differ  in  every  Zone  are  but 
the  outburst  or  the  fruition  of  the  Vibrations  pre- 
vailing in  each  belt.  Even  here  on  the  earth  realm 
we  find  every  locality  or  country  has  its  own 
production  due  to  the  Vibrations  and  chemical  con- 
ditions concentrated  in  that  locality — So  in  the 
world  of  Soul  the  Vibrations  graduate  from  pole 
to  pole  causing  their  own  special  manifestations 
and  conditions  which  are  centralized  in  every 
Zone. 

Here  too  we  find  most  attractive  parks  artist- 
ically arranged — with  their  Central  Fountains  or 
irridescent  sprays  gushng  to  great  heights  and 
falling  in  profusion  like  a  rainfall  of  diamonds  all 
lending  to  its  wonderful  charm.  The  perenials  and 
trees  growing  to  great  heights — the  flowers  of 

165 


wonderful  varieties  wafting  their  perfume  far  and 
wide.  The  beautiful  songsters  and  humming  birds 
all  enhance  the  grandeur  and  charm  of  the  quiet- 
ude in  these  parks  where  you  can  hear  all  Nature 
whispering  in  its  own  sweet  way  which  echoes 
in  the  iner-most  recesses  of  your  Soul. 

As  most  of  the  time  in  this  Holy  Zone  is  spent 
in  research  work  along  various  lines  which  the 
Soul  craves  or  in  ministering  to  others  not  much 
time  is  spent  in  outings  except  for  rest  and  med- 
itation. Nearly  every  active  moment  brings  some 
beneficial  results  to  the  dwellers  of  this  most 
wonderful  Zone.  No  time  is  ever  spent  in  idle 
talk  or  criticism — all  their  thoughts  have  reached 
the  pure  constructive  flow  of  Wisdom.  Their 
power  is  ever  directed  towards  uplifting  those 
who  have  not  yet  reached  these  heights  in  the 
world  of  Soul  and  to  those  who  are  still  groping 
in  the  dark  in  their  physical  expression  of  life 
on  this  material  plane  of  existence. 

Notwithstanding  the  many  advantages  of 
gathering  knowledge  and  information  through 
these  many  libraries — and  the  research  work  of 
the  Chemists  and  the  Astronomers  with  their 
many  instruments  of  which  we  have  no  concep- 
tion— their  Temples  of  Learning  play  a  great 
part  in  this  Zone.  Here  the  Masters  instruct  these 
dwellers  in  the  operations  and  results  of  the  still 
higher  Laws  of  the  still  Higher  Beings  and  their 
mission  and  of  the  work  that  lies  before  them  in 
the  next  Zone. 


166 


In  their  house  of  Congress  many  advanced 
Souls  gather  to  discuss  problems  confronting  hu- 
manity on  this  Earth  realm  promulgating  means 
and  ways  whereby  to  eliminate  the  disturbing 
elements  and  hindrances  of  progression  ever  from 
an  unselfish  view  complying  with  the  law  of  Evo- 
lution and  choosing  such  individuals  on  this  earth 
realm  to  carry  out  these  decisions  and  many  other 
problems  that  come  up  for  consideration  are  here 
placed  on  their  tables  where  they  are  carefully 
anylized  and  weighed  as  they  realize  the  res- 
ponsibility the  reaction  of  every  action,  and  after 
their  decisions  have  been  carefully  made — they 
are  placed  in  the  hands  of  Higher  Courts  for  tneir 
final  approval  or  rejection. 

The  inscription  on  their  House  of  Justice  is  in 
large  letters  of  Gold"Justice  to  the  Lord"  In  this 
beautiful  white  structure  are  various  departments 
where  many  problems  of  different  types  are  fully 
weighed  and  held  in  balance.  In  one  appartment 
you  will  find  all  the  Reformers  of  Religion  who 
in  the  past  where  instumental  in  ever  throwing 
that  which  was  unjust  and  held  man  in  ignorance 
and  bondage.  They  carefully  study  these  problems 
as  they  confront  man  and  are  lending  their  in- 
fluence towards  still  greater  changes  that  will 
manifest  in  the  near  future  realizing  the  change 
must  be  gradual  as  man  is  only  capable  of  shift- 
ing slowly.  These  problems  are  sifted  and  weigh- 
ed by  these  Intelligences  then  presented  to  a  High- 
er Court  to  still  Greater  Masters  for  final  decision. 


167 


In  another  department  you  will  find  such  In- 
telligences as  Washington — Jefferson — Adams — 
LaFayette — Lincoln  and  many  other  capable  ad- 
vanced Souls  carefully  weighing  the  problems  of 
politics  and  if  the  World  could  have  seen  this 
gathering  of  advanced  intelligences  together  with 
still  Higher  Souls  hover  near  the  Chair  of  our 
President — you  would  not  be  so  surprised  at  the 
wonderful  broad  vision  and  the  consideration  he 
has  given  to  the  world.  With  this  vision  you  could 
see  the  threads  of  internationalism  being  woven 
into  the  warp  and  woof  of  America — cemented  to- 
gether to  bring  about  the  Brotherhood  of  Man  that 
the  Spirit  of  Democracy  will  reign  here  on  Earth 
in  the  hearts  of  All  Men  in  the  near  future. 

It  must  be  conceded  that  instruments  in  the 
hands  of  the  Divine  Intelligences  do  not  always 
carry  out  the  scheme  as  intended  and  promulgated 
by  these  Souls  of  Wisdom  who  have  the  broader 
vision  and  who  have  the  Power  to  carry  forth 
their  will  but  realize  that  shifting  in  a  gradual 
scale  is  always  best  for  the  Finite  Mind  and  thus 
the  problems  eventually  mature  as  has  been  planed 
by  their  Higher  Courts. 

The  labor  problem  is  another  that  is  gradually 
being  fathomed  and  will  be  adjusted  as  rapidly  as 
man  is  ready  for  it.  All  selfish,  Self — centralized 
tendencies  must  be  wiped  out  and  capital  and  labor 
must  become  amalgamated.  Every  man  must  have 
the  privelege  of  owning  sufficient  land  for  a  home. 
The  World  belongs  to  God  and  God's  children  and 

168 


not  to  any  Self -centralized  corporations  for  spec- 
ulative purposes.  The  different  Nations  will  exe- 
cute laws  in  the  future  to  make  it  prohibitive  for 
a  man  to  own  more  than  his  own  home — the  land 
will  be  tilled  in  the  interests  of  all.  Women  are 
coming  into  their  own — she  being  naturally  intui- 
tive more  resourceful,  more  sympathetic — more  re- 
fined— is  unfolding  her  tendencies  and  possibilities 
and  her  influence  will  modify  and  gradually  help  to 
transform  the  more  aggressive  animal  nature  in 
man.  She  will  lead  him  to  higher  pinacles  of 
refinement  and  spirituality  and  the  day  will  come 
here  on  earth  when  all  will  tend  to  bringing  about 
conditions  and  laws  conducive  to  the  Soul's  pro- 
gression while  it  is  still  functioning  in  this  phy- 
sical body.  When  this  has  been  accomplished 
the  world  of  Soul  will  have  no  need  of  the  Dark 
Sphere  nor  the  Domestic — then  we  will  find  no- 
thing lower  in  the  Ethereal  world  than  such  con- 
ditions which  are  found  in  the  Third  Zone  today — 
which  is  a  beautiful  Sphere  of  Light  in  compar- 
ison with  the  Second  Zone. 

Impossible  to  overlook  the  magnificent  Cath- 
edral wich  surpasses  all  those  Grand  Cathedral 
structures  of  the  lower  Zones — its  wonderful  large 
organ — its  capacity  and  volume,  such  would  be  im- 
possible to  describe.  The  influence  that  these 
exquisite  strains  have  on  the  Soul  are  marvelous 
indeed.  Music  has  been  one  of  the  Great  features 
in  every  step  we  took  along  the  way.  When  the 
proper  Keynote  in  touched  the  Soul  quickens  into 

169 


a  consciousness  of  the  Sacred  Melody  of  the  Uni- 
verse. "Harmony  is  the  Keynote."  These  sublime 
Vibrations  flow  into  the  Soul  with  wonderful  Pow- 
er and  stir  the  Divine  Essence  within  into  Sym- 
pathy and  unspeakable  Love  for  All  Humanity. 

As  you  sit  in  this  Cathedral  listening  to  the 
Artists  performing  on  their  various  instruments 
especially  the  Harp — and  hear  the  sweetest  voices 
rendering  the  most  difficult  Music  with  perfect 
ease  your  Soul  is  stirred  with  ecstacy.  Sacred 
Music  such  as  is  not  known  with  us  and  many 
familiar  exquisite  strains  and  melodies  rendered 
on  the  earth  realm  are  rendered  more  perfectly 
here  in  this  Cathedral. 

Music  having  been  taught  in  every  Zone  as  the 
One  Essential  feature  for  Soul  Progression — as 
Music  of  all  kinds  sends  forth  vibrations  of  its 
own  qualities  and  leaves  its  influence  upon  the 
Soul.  These  vibrations  mingling  with  the  vibra- 
tions of  the  Soul  tends  to  either  modify  or  quicken 
the  Soul  into  higher  Vibrations.  In  every  Zone  the 
Soul  vibrates  with  the  substance  of  that  Zone.  The 
lower  Zone  corresponding  in  rate  of  Vibration  with 
the  color  red.  The  Seven  Zones  arange  in  sub- 
stance and  rate  of  Vibrations  with  the  colors  of 
the  Solar  beam  in  the  prism.  The  Soul  not  only 
vibrates  with  the  colors  of  the  Solar  beam  in  the 
prism  in  its  various  states  of  growth  but  also 
with  the  notes  in  the  scale  of  Music  in  its  dif- 
ferent keys,  on  its  journey  of  ascension. 

Commencing  with  the  lowest  Color  developed 

170 


from  the  Solar  beam  in  the  prism — red — corres- 
ponds in  its  rate  of  Vibration  with  the  lowest  Zone 
of  our  planet — the  dark  Zone. 

The  Second  Zone  whose  Light  is  like  our  twi- 
light— Orange  vibrates  with  the  orange  in  the 
prism. 

The  Third  Zone  which  is  the  first  Zone  of 
Light  and  wherein  we  begin  our  March  of  Spirit- 
ual progression  or  Soul  unfoldment  vibrates  with 
the  yellow  in  the  prism. 

The  Fourth  Zone  which  is  the  Great  Electrical 
Center  also  a  great  Musical  Center  vibrates  with 
the  green  in  the  prism. 

The  Fifth  Zone  whose  Light  is  pale  blue  which 
is  the  first  Holy  Heavenly  Zone  and  a  Fountain 
of  Wisdom  vibrates  with  the  blue  in  the  prism. 

The  Sixth  Zone  which  is  another  field  of  prep- 
aration whose  light  is  a  paler  blue  than  that  of 
the  Fifth — vibrates  with  the  indigo. 

The  Seventh  Zone  which  is  the  topmost  round 
of  our  planet  Earth  vibrates  with  the  violet. 

Each  of  these  Seven  colors  graduate  in  their 
different  blending  shades  and  the  next  color  be- 
gins where  the  last  shade  left  off — this  corres- 
ponds to  the  seven  gradations  in  every  Zone. 

Then  comes  the  First  Qelestial  whose  light 
partakes  of  the  most  delicate  blending  of  all  colors 
in  its  most  delicate  tints — producing  a  shimmering 
of  irridescent  most  delicate  tints  of  a  seashell — 
and  this  is  the  first  Celestial  Heaven  a  Divine 
Kingdom. 

171 


The  Second  Celestial  is  like  unto  the  burning 
flame  of  the  Sun  so  brilliant  is  this  Celestial  Heav- 
en— another  Divine  Kingdom. 

The  Third  Celestial  will  be  given  in  Volume  two 
begining  with  the  sixth  Zone. 

This  Zone  is  not  only  the  great  center  where  all 
things  have  reached  a  high  degree  of  perfection 
but  All  inventions  all  patents  in  any  line  whatso- 
ever have  been  tried  out  and  perfected  in  this 
Zone  ere  they  are  permitted  to  be  given  through 
the  various  channels  on  this  earth  realm. 

Not  only  is  this  Zone  the  Great  Center  or  Cul- 
mination of  all  Literature — Art — Music  and  all 
sciences  where  all  the  dwellers  have  access  to  every 
advantage — but  is  also  the  Great  Outlet  from 
whence  branch  forth  into  every  direction  its  know- 
ledge and  Wisdom  from  this  Great  Fountain  \vhich 
is  filled  to  overflowing  with  all  that  is  Good  and 
All  that  is  Sacred  and  Divine  in  any  line  whatso- 
ever you  may  desire  and  which  the  world  needs 
and  this  is  imparted  through  the  various  channels 
by  God's  Messengers  who  have  perfected  them- 
selves along  any  given  line  of  Wisdom.  All  the 
advancements  in  Electricity — Wireless  Aereo- 
planes  of  our  present  day  were  first  promulgated 
in  the  world  of  Soul  and  perfected  in  this  Center. 
In  the  days  of  the  Atlantians  they  used  aereo- 
planes  which  were  more  perfected  than  these  of 
our  present  day  on  this  earth.  Long  ere  the  Atlan- 
tic waves  rolled  over  that  Continent  the  Atlantians 
toured  the  Earth  in  a  very  short  period  of  time 

172 


and  their  aereoplanes  were  used  for  pleasure.  The 
wireless  telephones  will  yet  reach  a  high  degree 
of  perfection  on  this  earth  realm  and  many  other 
instruments  which  have  already  been  perfected 
in  this  Zone  will  be  handed  down — all  of  these  are 
brought  forth  as  necessities  to  co-operate  with  the 
advancement  of  the  Soul  or  in  other  words  its 
degree  of  unfoldment.  As  the  Soul  expands  into 
higher  degrees  of  unfoldment  its  efforts  for  exist- 
ence will  be  less  laborious  and  the  energy  that 
has  been  expended  and  directed  in  that  channel 
will  be  the  power  that  will  guide  the  Soul  towards 
the  Greater  Ideals  which  God  established  in  His 
Kjjngdolm. 

Music  in  the  Lower  Zones  is  always  of  a  higher 
quality  than  the  Soul  of  the  dwellers  of  that  Zone. 
The  composition  of  the  dwellers  express  their  Soul 
quality  or  unfoldment  as  well  as  thek  Intelectual 
attainment. 

The  scientifis  Value  of  the  Law  of  Vibration 
and  the  color  scheme  as  presented  by  the  Solar 
beam  in  the  prism  is  taught  in  all  of  the  Zones 
beginning  with  the  Third. 

In  every  Zone  the  atoms  are  gathered  by  the 
chemists  to  show  the  difference  in  Vibration  and 
its  chemical  combinations  and  hence  in  its  color 
values — these  the  dwellers  desect  and  witness  that 
they  may  understand  Nature's  laws  in  back  of 
which  is  One  Law  which  we  call  God  which  they 
gradually  perceive  as  they  advance  in  the  scale 
of  life. 


173 


Mans*  Religion  here  on  this  Earth  realm  will 
yet  be  founded  on  scientific  principles  as  manifest- 
ed in  Nature  throughout  the  limitless  Universe — 
instead  of  Dogmas — Creeds — Beliefs  and  Delu- 
sions. Whenever  Man  expands  into  a  Conscious  real- 
ization that  the  Universality  of  Law  manifests  it- 
self in  every  Soul  regardless  of  its  degree  of  un- 
foldment — or  the  race  or  color  through  which  it 
manifests  in  this  physical  expression  of  life — then 
the  Spirit  of  democracy  will  reign  and  the  Brother- 
hood of  Man  will  be  established  and  the  Father- 
hood and  Motherhood  of  God  will  be  the  Found- 
ation principles  of  Religion  throughout  this  World. 
Then  all  will  be  taught  that  the  Soul  of  Man  in 
every  degree  in  every  plane  in  every  condition  is 
Sacred — Holy — Divine — for  within  it  lie  dormant 
all  the  possibilities  and  all  the  potentialities  of  all 
that  has  been  and  all  that  ever  will  be  and  is  an 
Essential — Important  and  necessary  part  of  the 
Whole.  God  and  His  handiwork  would  not  be 
complete  without  each  and  every  Soul. 

May  all  come  to  a  realization  that  the  Sacred 
Temple  not  built  with  hands  is  the  Eternal  Temple 
of  the  Soul.  May  the  blessings  of  the  Divine  In- 
finite Source  of  all  life  and  All  Light  so  abund- 
antly flow  into  your  pathway  that  you  will  ever 
be  conscious  of  His  brooding  presence  and  feel 
His  Spirit  Breath  is  my  prayer. 

Thou  glorious  heavenly  shore 
Where  is  found  all  ancient  lore 


174 


Where  all  may  bask  in  Wisdoms  lyre 
Which  the  very  Soul  inspires 
With  facts  and  truths  that  have  expired 
In  the  Minds  of  all  earthly  choir. 

Thou  glorious  heavenly  shores 
Wher  all  literature  and  psychic  lore 
Has  been  written  and  revealed 
Registered  and  ever  promulgated 
Throughout  the  ages  of  this  Emeral  Isle 
Since  Man  began  for  Wisdom  to  aspire. 

Thou  glorious  heavenly  shores 
Where  all  ancient  and  biblical  lore 
Has  ever  been  registered  and  reserved 

That  man  may  peruse  its  pages 
And  look  back  through  out  the  ages 
View  the  path  through  which  he  came. 

Thou  glorious  heavenly  shore 

Where  are  registered  forevermore 

All  records  of  our  daily  doings 

All  mistakes  and  idle  wooings 

All  the  good  through  loving  kindness 

Awakening  Man  from  all  his  blindness. 

Thou  glorious  heavenly  shores 
Where  Masters  register  their  lore 
In  Art  and  Music  so  sublime 
In  Science  and  literature  Divine 


175 


Chemistry — calculas  and  Mathematics 
History — philosophy  and  Poetry  to  rhyme. 

Thou  glorious  heavenly  shore 
Where  Masters  dwell  and  evermore 
Leave  the  imprint  of  their  Power 
Along  their  line  that  they  may  shower 
The  Souls  that  climb  these  heights 
With  Wisdom  in  which  they  may  delight. 

Thou  glorious  heavenly  shores 
Where  all  who  dwell  in  Love  Divine 
Reach  out  to  Him  whose  Wisdom  so  sublime 
Has  built  these  many  Mansions  for  the  Soul 
Where  all  can  share  alike  His  Plan 
And  see  His  glorious  blessings  expand, 

Thou  glorious  heavenly  shores 
Where  all  dwellers  bask  in  Thy  Light 
Where  all  praises  to  the  Lord  are  Sung 
Through  lyric  harmony  by  Angelic  Choir 
That  reverberate  through  out  this  Zone 
Quickening  the  Soul  into  praises  to  the  Lord. 


176 


CONCLUSION. 

As  the  Soul  looks  back  from  these  sublime 
heights,  viewing  the  steps  through  which  we  have 
ascended  and  meditating  with  great  satisfaction 
and  joy  over  the  present  degree  of  victory  over 
Self  and  the  Heavenly  state  and  environments  sur- 
rounding us,  we  feel  that  we  have  traveled  a 
great  ways  and  that  we  have  gained  a  great  ob- 
jective point  in  our  journey  through  this  country 
which  no  traveler  on  this  planet  can  avoid  or 
escape. 

Then  turning  our  faces  upward  where  the  Soul 
gets  a  glimpse  of  the  journey  that  still  lies  before 
us,  ere  we  reach  the  topmost  round  of  this  planet, 
we  begin  to  realize  that  we  have  scarcely  begun 
our  journey,  we  have  just  entered  the  sacred  path 
and  the  m)ost  sublime  part  of  our  journey  is  yet 
before  us. 

Then  as  we  meditate  over  the  knowledge  and 
experiences  already  attained — and  over  the  joys 

177 


and  the  blessings  that  have  already  become  our 
own,  a  part  of  our  selves,  it  is  with  unspeakable 
ecstacy  that  the  Soul  looks  forward  to  being  a 
participant  in  the  Holy  Atmosphere  and  the  Divine 
Wisdom — a  dweller  in  the  City  of  Peace — the 
Light  of  the  Eternal  Day,  and  then  bathe  in  the 
Whirlpool  of  Life — the  fountain  of  Bliss  that  a- 
waits  us — ere  our  journey  of  One  Cycle  is  com- 
plete. 

We  now  realize  that  with  every  step  of  advance 
we  have  the  privelege  of  meeting  and  mingling 
with  still  greater  Souls  than  those  who  descend  to 
these  Zones  through  which  we  have  just  traveled. 
We  have  thus  far  found  Teachers,  Masters,  Adepts, 
Seers,  Sages  and  Wise  Men  and  have  seen  Music 
and  Art  in  a  degree  of  perfection. 

There  are  many  Souls  who  are  still  higher  in  the 
Scale  of  Life  who  do  not  descend  below  the  Sixth 
and  Seventh  Zones.  These  Shinging  Lights  are 
a  glorious  Sight  to  behold.  Their  radiation  is 
so  luminous  and  their  Power  so  great  that  it  would 
be  as  an  electric  shock  to  come  in  contact  with 
these  Beings  and  their  Power.  Hence  they  must 
wait  until  they  climb  the  heights  wherein  they 
can  stand  the  contact  with  this  indescribable 
Power.  They  must  wait  until  they  are  ready  to 
digest  the  Eternal  facts  or  Wisdom  that  flows 
from  their  Illumined  Consciousness.  They  must 
wait  until  their  own  Souls  have  become  so  purified 
and  regenerated  that  they  can  be  a  part  of  this 
Sacred  Sublime  Holy  Atmosphere. 


178 


They  realize  that  as  they  enter  the  sixth  Zone 
they  will  find  another  field  where  they  can  pre- 
pare themselves  for  this  Divine  Crystal  City  as 
they  have  been  taught  by  the  Masters  in  the 
Fifth  Zone. 

After  reaching  these  heights  all  are  anxious  to 
be  priveleged  to  see  and  mingle  with  the  Great 
Central  Figure  of  the  Soul  World— That  Great 
Shining  Light  whom  we  know  as  Jesus  of  Naz- 
areth, the  Christ.  Here  all  doubts  that  may  ever 
have  entered  the  consciousness  of  any  Soul  re- 
garding His  Identity — regarding  the  facts  of  His 
embodiment  on  this  physical  plane  of  Life — will 
entirely  vanish  and  their  Souls  will  fill  with  love  to 
overflowing  at  the  very  sight  of  this  Heavenly 
Divine  Being — Our  Christ  who  now  dwells  in  that 
Crystal  City  beyond  our  Earth's  Ethereal  Zones. 

Not  only  shall  we  meet  Him  face  to  face  but 
also  the  Lesser  Lights  who  were  His  apostles  Here 
on  this  Earth  realm  and  who  now  are  seen  in  this 
Isle  beyond  our  Earth's  Spheres.  Not  only  these 
shall  we  meet  but  we  shall  see  those  who  were  the 
Messiahs  in  previous  dispensations — for  it  must 
be  remembered  that  Jesus  of  Nazareth,  "Our 
Christ"  was  the  Fifth  Messiah  and  the  Culmin- 
ation of  His  harvest  was  the  fifth  dispensation; 
and  too  let  us  awaken  to  the  fact  that  the  sixth 
dispensation  is  being  ushered  in  and  it's  culmin- 
ation will  be  just  one  half  of  the  Messiahs  who 
will  come  to  this  planet.  More  of  these  facts 
will  be  given  in  Volume  2. 

179 


If  you  can  comprehend  the  Power  of  these  Di- 
vine Beings  who  are  known  as  Angels-then  you 
may  perceive  in  a  degree  the  light  and  power  of 
a  Messiah  such  as  Jesus,  the  Nazarene,  such  as 
His  Power  was  here  on  this  Earth  realm  and  such 
as  it  is  now  after  nearly  two  thousand  years.  Then 
turn  your  minds  to  the  Intersolar  Lights — the 
Divine  Lights — and  Demi — gods — and  many  other 
Intelligences  still  higher  in  the  scale  of  Life  and 
Power  which  are  not  known  on  this  Earth  Realm 
and  which  no  finite  mind  in  its  present  degree  of 
unfoldment  could  perceive.  Such  are  the  steps 
that  lie  before  you,  all  of  which  every  Soul  will 
some  time  witness — not  only  this  but  every  Soul 
will  sometime  attain  these  heights  in  the  same 
degree  of  unfoldment — such  is  life  and  such  is 
God's  plan  and  such  is  God's  Law. 

Every  Soul  contains  within  its  divine  essence  the 
potentialities  and  possibilities  of  an  Angel — a  Rul- 
ing Angel — a  Messiah — and  so  on  up  the  ladder  of 
life.  But  how  can  those  who  have  ascended  these 
heights  reveal  to  you  the  wisdom  that  you  are  not 
ready  for?  How  can  you  comprehend  God  so 
long  as  you  do  not  understand  God's  plan  of 
evolution — so  long  as  you  have  not  unfolded  the 
finer  perceptions  of  the  Soul — your  spritual  senses 
so  long  as  you  have  not  become  cleansed  and  have 
not  overcome  the  selfish  egotistical,  superstitious 
and  erroneous  conglomerations  that  have  filled 
your  Consciousness.  How  can  you  enter  the  path 
which  begins  in  the  Third  Ethereal  Zone — to  jour- 

180 


ney  towards  the  Triumphant  March  of  the  Soul — 
until  all  errors  and  Self  has  been  overcome  and 
outgrown — and  facts  which  exist  throughout  Na- 
ture have  taken  their  place? 

Awake — Arise  out  of  your  dreams  of  Material- 
ity and  Selfishness  and  behold  God's  Glorious  and 
Sublime  Plan  which  leads  you  to  the  Eternal  Day, 
the  City  of  Peace  and  Light  and  from  thence  to 
the  Fountain  of  Bliss  or  One-ness. 

Volume  2.  will  answer  the  question  which  has 
been  asked  throughout  the  ages — where  do  we 
go  and  from  whence  have  we  come  and  the  purpose 
of  life?  The  conditions  and  facts  as  they  exist 
in  the  Sixth  and  Seventh  heavenly  Zones,  which 
completes  the  topmost  round  of  our  planet,  also 
the  conditions  and  facts  of  the  First,  Second  and 
Third  Celestial  Heavens — or  fountain  of  Bliss 
which  concludes  our  march  of  progression  for  the 
Children  of  Earth.  You  will  be  the  travelers 
through  this  country  and  dwellers  of  every  Zone, 
functioning  through  higher  degrees  of  conscious- 
ness in  every  step  of  advance. 

So  it  behooves  every  individual  to  become  ac- 
quainted with  God's  plan  and  Know  of  this  Ethe- 
real world  and  its  laws  that  you  may  not  be  a 
stranger  in  a  strange  land,  not  knowing  which  way 
to  turn  or  what  to  do  on  your  awakening  or  transi- 
tion from  this  physical  body  into  the  Soul  World. 

That  you  will  not  tarry  by  the  wayside  in  dark- 
ness nor  wait  in  the  twilight  for  the  Dawn  of  Day. 
That  you  may  enter  the  path  that  leads  uninter- 

181 


ruptedly  in  gradual  ascension  reavealing  God's 
Laws  and  His  Plan  in  every  step  of  advance  until 
you  come  face  to  face  with  His  Messengers  of 
Light  and  Power  ever  going  upward  and  onward 
towards  Perfection — ever  gaining  but  never  at- 
taining Absolute  Perfection — Progression  for  ever 
and  ever  growing  nearer  and  nearer  like  unto  God. 

Thou  Messengers  of  Love  Divine 
Guide  and  Guard  the  Holy  Shrine 
May  Thy  Knowlege  and  Wisdom  flow 
Into  every  avenue  here  below 
That  Peace  and  Good-Will  shall  reign 
In  the  hearts  of  all  men  and  deign 
The  Spirit  of  Love  for  all  mankind 
Forever  and  ever  through  out  all  time. 

*  The  book  on  the  laws  of  progression  will  soon 
follow. 


182 


i  OS 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


